Revit Architecture 2009

Imperial Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM03A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 . 159 . 164 . 171 . 177 . 181 . 181 . 184 . 187 . 189 . 192 . 197 . 197 . 201 . 205 . 208

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . 213 . 219 . 223 . 226 . 226 . 231 . 233 . 236 . 238 . 244 . 252 . 255 . 255 . 257 . 260 . 264 . 264 . 266 . 266

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 269 . 270 . 274 . 274 . 284 . 286 . 291 . 294 . 295

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . 302 . 309 . 313 . 314 . 317 . 319 . 323 . 324 . 324 . 325 . 327

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 343 . 349 . 349 . 351 . 351 . 355 . 361 . 361 . 363 . 365 . 366 . 372 . 373 . 373 . 374

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 . 398 . 405 . 409 . 413 . 417

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 418 . 421 . 425 . 430 . 431 . 434 . 436

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 . 438 . 439 . 441 . 443 . 444 . 445 . 446 . 446 . 449 . 450 . 450 . 453 . 453 . 454 . 460 . 460

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 . 465 . 466 . 469 . 472 . 473 . 475 . 477 . 478 . 482 . 484 . 487 . 490 . 497 . 498 . 505 . 509

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 531 . 542 . 544 . 544 . 547 . 550 . 553 . 554 . 555 . 558

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 . 563 . 568 . 571 . 573 . 576 . 578 . 580 . 581 . 584 . 592 . 592 . 594 . 595

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 . 610 . 616 . 618 . 622 . 622 . 624 . 627 . 630 . 630 . 633 . 634 . 637 . 640 . 644 . 646 . 650 . 655

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 . 659 . 667 . 671

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 674 . 674 . 677 . 680 . 680

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 . 684 . 691 . 695 . 697 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 716 . 719

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 . 724 . 724 . 728 . 732 . 735 . 740

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 . 746 . 756 . 763

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 . 778 . 787 . 790 . 792 . 795 . 795 . 797 . 801 . 802 . 803

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 809 . 811 . 813 . 814 . 817 . 817 . 821 . 823 . 826 . 831 . 833 . 834 . 837 . 837 . 838 . 843 . 845 . 848 . 849 . 851

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

and open Imperial\Templates. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. If you move the partition. schedules. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In this case. you will use the default template. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. For most tutorial projects. You learn the terminology.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2D and 3D view. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. sections. every drawing sheet. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. hence. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. review the Revit Architecture templates. 13 Click OK. the parameter is one of association or connection. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 12 Select default. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the floor or roof remains connected. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. how to navigate the user interface. and schedules required for a building project. and residential. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. scope.rte. click Training Files. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the hierarchy of elements. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and phases when you need it. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the door retains this relationship to the partition. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the operation of the software is parametric. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and customize the project as necessary. If the length of the elevation is changed. and click Open. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawings. and plans. drawing sheets. quantities. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In the Revit Architecture model. construction. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. windows. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and reference planes are datum elements. windows. For example. walls and roofs are hosts. and keynotes are annotation elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. programming is not required. dimensions. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. dimensions.When you change something. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and 2D detail components. For example. For example. grids. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. doors. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and roofs are model elements. filled regions. tags. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw. Examples include detail lines. walls. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. They display in relevant views of the model. For example. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. They help to describe or document the model. Datum elements help to define project context. tags. levels. For example. doors. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and cabinets are model components. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.

you can explicitly control them. or bottom of foundation. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. schedules. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. and types. for example. The project file contains all information for the building design. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and drawings of the design. elevation views. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. such as roofs. first floor. By using a single project file. you must be in a section or elevation view. floors. To place levels. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases. This information includes components used to design the model. and ceilings. families. However. and so forth). Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you do nothing to establish these relationships. for example. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. Project: In Revit Architecture. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Often. top of wall. section views. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Most often. views of the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. from geometry to construction data. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design.In Revit Architecture.

making it easy to understand what each button represents. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). identical use. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. specifically its clear user interface. such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. A type can be a specific size of a family. floors. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. the user interface is labeled. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. In the following illustration.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. System families can be transferred between projects. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . In the steps that follow. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. ceilings. dimensions. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. However. roofs. and levels. categories of model elements include walls and beams. System families include walls. For example. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. For example. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use.

TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. By default. This creates a new project based on the default template. click (New). 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In addition. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.

You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. For example. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. and View. While working in the drawing area. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. which are listed on the menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Edit. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . On the left side of the Options Bar. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 9 In the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. when you add a door. a door type is specified. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. For example.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. immediately below the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . In the drawing area.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. select Views (all). Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. In the Project Browser.

■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. delete. windows). reports. families. family category (doors. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. families. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and groups. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. To open a view. schedules. and group name. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. sheets.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. and rename views. The browser is dockable. double-click its name. walls. elevations. 3D).

the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. Do not click. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. In this case. In the bottom left corner of the window. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. click Wall. click Cancel.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor displays as a pencil. After creating a browser organization scheme.

you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. find a keyword on the Index tab. press F1 for help. press F1 for context-sensitive help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Click the Help button. regarding selected elements in a view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Toolbar: From the toolbar. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. in conjunction with tooltips. In the status bar. click on the Standard toolbar. Windows: From any window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Modify to end the Wall command. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol.18 On the Design Bar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. 20 Press TAB. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. If no Help button displays. You can use this tri-pane. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. It highlights when the cursor is over it. When you place the cursor over an element. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. In addition. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. The status bar also provides information. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . Tooltips: To see tooltips. There are several tools that help you find information. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 5 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the view zooms out from the building model.rvt. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. click Training Files. In the following steps. In the drawing area. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . on the View toolbar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. To modify or add snap increments. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click in the drawing area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 10 To display SteeringWheels. . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. When you release the mouse button. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. As you move the mouse.

to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 18 Click and drag the left control. For more information about SteeringWheels. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. When drawing or modifying a building model. moving the wheel to the desired location. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. expand Views (all). 15 To exit the wheel. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. display along the ends. Cnst. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and then using the Zoom tool again. Similar controls.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 17 Type ZR. referred to as shape handles. and double-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. and select the wall. Small blue dots. and click Help. press ESC. as shown. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . These are the drag controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. bottoms. called drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and click the SteeringWheels tab.

Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. 23 Click next to the lower wall. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click to specify the starting position. In this case. Some commands. you want to move the table closer to the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. for example. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . click (Move). such as Move and Copy. and click again to specify the ending position. and on the Tools toolbar. The table moves down. as shown. After selecting the element to move.

28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. 26 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. and drag it on top of the table. select the second item in the list. Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. on the Standard toolbar. such as the Lines command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. and click again to end it.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 24 Select the plant. Some commands.

click Modify. On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. When you have finished these tutorials. or referenced as a drafting view. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. and annotate building assemblies. In Revit Architecture. detail. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Use detail components to define an assembly. but for training purposes. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In this tutorial. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. illustrating how building components work together. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. 27 . details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only.

for Name. enter Window Head Detail. scroll until the folder is displayed. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. If necessary.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. import a DWG detail. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and reference a drafting view. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. click Drafting View. and click OK. 3 In the Scale list. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. create a reference callout. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you will create a drafting view.

drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. displaying the extents of the detail. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The drawing area is still blank. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. and click Open. 6 In the Colors field list. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 9 Type ZR. click Training Files. select Black and White.dwg. as shown. The model zooms out.). Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. located directly to the left of the drawing area. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. 10 In the drawing area.In the Project Browser. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. in the Type Selector. click Callout. to activate the view selection list. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Reference other view. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 12 On the Options Bar.The view displays to the specified area. and in the Scale list.

Model-Based Detailing | 31 . select Detail View: Detail. 2 On the Options Bar. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. in the Type Selector. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. 3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. adjust the detail view display settings. select Callout. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. and in the Scale list.The reference callout is created. double-click the reference callout tag head. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.rvt.

under Detail Views (Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Wall Base 1. for Name. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0. under Detail Views(Detail). 6 In the drawing area. enter Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Rename.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

bordered by a solid line. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

14 In the drawing area. under Graphics. right-click. 13 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 Click OK. for Display Model. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. select As Underlay. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. and click View Properties.

and press ENTER. By grouping detail components. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 20 In the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . 19 In the Type Selector. 17 On the View Control Bar. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region.Brick on Mtl. Directly above the drawing area. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. on the Options Bar. typical details can easily be placed. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. click Detail Components. type 1' 6''. If the crop region is enlarged. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Stud. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model.

expand Groups ➤ Detail. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 23 Using the same method. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. add the following detail components as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. and click Create Instance. as shown.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail.

select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail.

and format keynote styles. for Full Path. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. For more information about customizing a keynote database. and under Keynote Table. map keynotes by material. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. in the type selector. Leader. click Browse. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. 4 On the Options Bar. special notes. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. You can customize this list. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. click Training Files. or instructions within a construction documentation package. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .txt. c_express_workshop_details_start. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. click Keynote ➤ Element. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. In the next exercise. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and Free End are selected. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. and verify that Horizontal.

If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. Keynoting | 39 . If no value has been specified. a question mark displays. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. Either move the text inside. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 8 Click to place the tag.5 In the drawing area. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 9 Press ESC to end the command. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 7 Click to place the leader arm. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard .

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Material. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 16 In the drawing area.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 15 Select 07 21 00. 13 Click to place the tag. 12 Click to place the leader arm.

You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Only the keynotes remain selected. 17 On the Options Bar. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 19 In the Type Selector. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. legends. Select Keynote Tags. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).All items within the selection display in red. Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents.Boxed. Click Check None. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.

Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. update the project information element properties. and modify and update the project sheet title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. this tutorial uses imperial units only. In this lesson. In this exercise. Place views on drawing sheets. you will create a sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add labels to a title block.

3 Click OK. In the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. If necessary. In Revit Architecture.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet.rvt. or in the element properties of the title block. click Training Files.

You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Rename. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. To zoom in and out. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Then. For Name. you can enter ZE to zoom out. In this tutorial. 8 On the Design Bar. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. enter A602. 6 In the Title Block.Unnamed. To pan. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. click Modify to clear the selection. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. right-click A602 . hold down the wheel and drag. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. double-click Checker. roll the wheel.4 Type ZR. 5 In the drawing area. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Click OK. under Sheets(all). Smith and press ENTER. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Sections/Details. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 7 Enter K.

select Text : 1/8''. 17 On the Design Bar. enter Design Development. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. in the Type Selector. 13 Click OK. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. Smith. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. For Client Name. 16 Type ZR. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. select the title block. enter 4/10/2008. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 20 Click and type Project Status. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Status.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Name. (Left) is selected. enter J. click Text. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.

21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. as shown. click (Load into Project). add Project Issue Date parameter. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown. under Category Parameters. click Modify to exit the command. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. click Label. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. and verify that (Top) are selected. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and click. 23 On the Design Bar. select Label : 3/16''. to add 28 Using the same method. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 22 Using the same method. 29 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector.

and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. select Override parameter values of existing types. you will create. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. a viewport displays.30 In the Reload Family dialog. click Training Files. for Full Path.txt. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . and under Keynote Table. and click Yes.Project. enter Keynote Legend . click Browse. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Next you will create. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. representing the view or schedule. for Name. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. place and modify a keynote legend. to a drawing sheet. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A601 . 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Sheets (all). 8 In the Project Browser. as shown.Sections/Details. and click OK. clear Show Headers. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. on the Appearance tab. and drag Keynote Legend . expand Legends. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.

The keynote legend is visible. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .Project as shown. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.

at the bottom of the Filter tab. and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. not keynotes. enter Keynote Legend . expand Detail Views (Detail). as shown. for View Name. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The Keynote Legend is now blank. for Filter.Project. right-click Keynote Legend . and click Properties. select Filter by sheet. 19 Click OK twice. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. under Legends. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Sheet.

Title Sheet 1. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The view title with line displays below the viewport. under Sheets (all). and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. double-click A0 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 .The keynote legend is automatically updated. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. The view remains selected. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and then add and update a Drawing list. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. 2 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Type Selector. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. The drawing list remains selected. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and zoom in on the drawing list. 5 In the Project Browser. define the information to include in a view title. expand Schedules/Quantities.When you place a view on a sheet. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. As part of a construction document set. as shown. You can specify text attributes for view titles. or omit view titles from sheets. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. Press ESC to clear the selection. 6 Type ZR. by default. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed.

Ceiling Plans. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. clear Appears In Drawing List. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. The drawing list display is updated. including only sheets that contain views.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). while pressing SHIFT. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click the selected sheets. and click Properties. select A602 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . under Identity Data.Sections/Details and select A801 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. and click OK.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. For example. a curtain wall. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a central service core. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. As you develop the building design. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. 57 . the wall or column will move with it. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. If the grid moves. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. it is good practice to test the constraints.

and residential. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. 3 Under Template file. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. with an RVT extension. For this project.rte. click Training Files. South. notice four elevation markers. and click Browse. click New. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. and open Imperial\Templates\default. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Create new. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. East. construction. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 5 Click OK. verify that the second option is selected. you will use the default template. and customize the project as necessary. views. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. from the product library. you design inside the elevation markers. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. but contains no geometry. select Project. you load any required family type that is not in your project. such as a door or window. To create the project file. and settings. The project is stored as a single file. you use a template that is provided with the software. The new project opens. West. After the beginning exercises. In the drawing area in the right pane. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. Creating the Project In this exercise. In practice. under Projects. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. In views that display elevation markers. levels.

7 If necessary. double-click Imperial. Families. Groups. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. created by the template. expand Views (all). and elevation views created in the project by the template. Ceiling Plans. As you design and document your building model. and families in your project. delete.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. 14 For File name. and Elevations (Building Elevation). content and building model reports. will be accessible from the Project Browser. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 8 Under Floor Plans. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. sheets. These views are customizable: you can rename them. display in the south elevation. and click Training Files. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the file window. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Sheets (all). enter Revit Retail Building. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. locate the Project Browser. and delete them. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and duplicate levels. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. change their properties. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. Creating the Project | 59 . This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. NOTE If you create a project without a template.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. double-click South. heights. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Schedules/Quantities. duplicate them. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Two level lines. such as schedules and legends. notice the Legends. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and other properties. as well as change their names. schedules. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. reflected ceiling plan views. You can add. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). then expand Floor Plans. the view you see in the drawing area. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).

and windows within the building model. doors.15 For Save as type. You learn how the levels are locked. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. You change the names of the 2 default levels. the other levels move and change with it. expand Views (all). After you modify the two default levels. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Adding Project Levels on page 60. or constrained. view the Save reminder interval. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. to each other. so that when one level moves. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. enter 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. When you begin designing. 16 Click Save. and on the General tab. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building.rvt) is selected. you will want to save your work frequently. and double-click South. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. verify that Project Files (*. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Adding Project Levels In this exercise.

verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and press ENTER. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. not all the tabs are visible. When you add the new level. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. and press ENTER. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. enter 0'. As you move the cursor. and click Basics. 16 Enter 12'-6''. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. view the Design Bar. If it does not. Next. click Level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. enter 01 Entry Level. This is the Options Bar. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and click OK. right-click. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 14 Click Plan View Types. 12'-6'' above 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. By default. which should display by default. (You do not have to click to specify the start point.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. enter -6'. and then move it up. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 5 In the Project Browser.

Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). 25 Click to place the level line. right-click Level 3. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. using a different option. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 12'-6'' above the 02 Level line. and for Offset. and enter 02 Level. and move it slightly upward. click Level. click Rename. If you create a level by copying it. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 23 On the Options Bar. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and rename the corresponding views. under Floor Plans. or on the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. 26 Press ESC. 19 Click OK. add 3 levels 12’-6” apart above 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add another level. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. enter 12'-6''.18 In the Project Browser. Next.

The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Notice that by moving the top level. Adding Project Levels | 63 . as shown. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. If you select a level and click its lock.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. all the levels move. and you can move them independently. the levels are no longer constrained.

so that if the roof elevation changes. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. specify a start point for the grid line. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. select (Draw).Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. When the grid is complete. double-click 00 Foundation. In a later exercise. click Modify. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. In the following exercise. click Grid. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. under Floor Plans. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor up. 3 On the Options Bar. the column height changes as well. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Design Bar.

5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 25'. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. On the Options Bar. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. enter 25'. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. enter 15'. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click Grid. Next. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to place the line. Enter A. and click to place the line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Click to place the grid line. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). Creating a Column Grid | 65 . for Offset.

click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click (Aligned). and specify the grid line endpoint. click Grid. On the Options Bar.8 Press ESC. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0'. as shown. click Dimension. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 11 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 25' and 15'.

You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select grid lines C and 3. 22 While pressing CTRL. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 21 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. If necessary. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click Modify. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 18 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. By pinning these central grid lines. ■ Creating a Column Grid | 67 . and press ESC. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.15 Starting with grid line A. and select grid line A. The pins are hidden. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. Two pins display on the grid lines. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. until it is closer to grid line A. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 24 Press ESC. until it is closer to grid line 5. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right.

35 In the Type Selector. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. select grid line 5. 33 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and select None. click Duplicate. enter 2''. click the value for Center Segment. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Element Properties). select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. 29 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. click Modify. 34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.Create a custom grid family type In some cases. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 32 Click OK twice. click . and click OK. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 36 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 31 For End Segments Length. 26 In the drawing area.

select all of the grid lines. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 43 Press ESC. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. For Place By. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. and press ESC. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. click (Grid Intersection). and unlock it. and on the Options Bar. 45 While pressing CTRL. 46 On the Options Bar. select grid line A.37 Select the grid lines again. and press ENTER. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Finish. 47 Enter 18'. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x49. and in the Type Selector. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble. 39 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. click Activate Dimensions.

If it is unlocked. Next. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. ■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. for From. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 52 On the Options Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser.48 On the Standard toolbar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the target point of the camera. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. select 01 Entry Level. lock it. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. click Camera.

54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

In the Rename View dialog. The current view. Adding Beams In this exercise. and click OK. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. under Views (all). and click Rename. named 3D View 1 by default. expand 3D Views. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. Adding Beams on page 72. displays in bold under 3D Views. enter To Building. Right-click 3D View 1. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add beams to build the structure of the building model.

4 Click Medium. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . view the icons on the View Control Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.When you finish adding beams. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. click (Create Beam On Grid). The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click 01 Entry Level. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. select each grid line. under Floor Plans. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. 7 On the Options Bar. the icon on the right side of the scale. click Beam. 8 While pressing CTRL. Adding Beams | 73 . you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.

10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Modify. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 12 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. and click Select All Instances. 9 On the Options Bar. Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Finish. right-click. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click (Default 3D View). The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 14 Select one of the beams.The selected grid lines display as red.

06 Roof. under Instance Parameters. which only extend to the 5th level. right-click. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. When you created the columns. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 21 With the column selected. click 24 Press ESC.17 In the Select Levels dialog. right-click. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Top Level. All of the columns display as red. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 22 On the Options Bar. select 06 Roof. and click OK. select 02 Level. 20 Click Cancel. press and hold SHIFT. view the Top Level parameter. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. and click Select All Instances. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. (Element Properties). but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and click Element Properties. Adding Beams | 75 . select 06 Roof.

Because the Model Graphics Style is Hidden Line and the Detail Level is Coarse. under Elevations. NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. resize the view to see the entire structure. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. the structural elements display only as lines. under 3D Views. double-click South. double-click To Building. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.25 In the Project Browser. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and if necessary.

you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces | 77 . you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. click Framing Elevation. Adding Braces on page 77.27 Save the drawing. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces In this exercise. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. To better add the braces to the structure.

and press ESC to end the command. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. double-click the elevation marker arrow. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. The associated framing elevation view displays. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.

click to specify the start point of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. but when placed the braces are placed. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 8 In the Type Selector. click Brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected.6 Select the crop region (if necessary). Adding Braces | 79 . The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them.

Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. The height of the roof lowers. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. After you add the final brace. delete it and redraw it. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. press ESC twice. and press ENTER. NOTE Do not copy or array braces.11 Using the same technique. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. enter 59'. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

double-click 00 Foundation. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 14 On the Standard toolbar. but this time add them from right to left. under Floor Plans. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. enter 33'. Adding Braces | 81 .13 Double-click the 04 Level height.

20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 21 Select grid line A. under Elevations. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE As you add braces. 24 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and on the Options Bar. double-click South. under Floor Plans. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 80'. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. enter 35'. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 23 In the Project Browser. as shown in the 3D view below.

and how to load specific families into a project. grid size. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. click and roof height. beams. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. and if necessary. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 28 On the Standard toolbar. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Foundation | 83 . Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. lock it. Creating a Foundation on page 83. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. Before you can add the pile caps. 31 Save the drawing. After you load the pile cap family. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. double-click 00 Foundation.Test connectivity of the columns. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. and drag it away from the structure.

click Edit. and click Create Similar. In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 7 Select 81'' x 81'' x 36''. and open Imperial\Families\Structural\Foundations\Pile Cap-Rectangular. A warning displays. The Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. for Level.2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC twice. Click OK twice. for View Range. In the View Range dialog. under View Depth. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Expand Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. expand Families. 9 Close the warning dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and click View Properties. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and drag it to the drawing area. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. select Unlimited. and expand Structural Foundations. The pile cap has been added in the view. under Extents. press ESC twice. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. When the final pile cap is placed. click Training Files. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. The foundation pile cap now displays.

and open Imperial\i_RRB_update_structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.rvt. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. You load new column. and brace families into the project.13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. you change the types of the columns. beam. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. beams. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. click Training Files. and braces that you used to create the building structure.

625. and click Select All Instances. 6 In the Type Selector. select HSS-Round Hollow Structural Section-Column:HSS20X. 2 Select one of the columns. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 In the Type Selector. select Round Bar: 1''. 3 In the Type Selector.Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. click Brace. under 3D Views. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.0500. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section:HSS8X4X. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. right-click. click Modify. double-click {3D}. The building model displays the round hollow columns. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. All columns in the building model display as red. 4 On the Design Bar. right-click.

22 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select the braces in the elevation one by one. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 16 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). under Dimensions. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3''. and open Imperial\i_RRB_architectural. click Modify. click (Element Properties).rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After the files are linked. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). for d. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. and changing its size parameter. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Elevation 1-a. 10 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 17 While pressing CTRL. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 3''. click Edit/New. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. for Type. click Training Files. The brace type changes. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to Round Bar: 3''. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar.This not the size that you want to use. click Modify. but it is the only size of its type currently available. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. select Round Bar: 3''. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the Round Bar: 1'' bar type.

the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. select Auto . 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In this case. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. and walls could also be copy/monitored. select i_RRB_structure_complete. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. depending on the project. under Elevations. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. structural members. and click Open. 6 In the drawing area. double-click South. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 3 Under Positioning.Origin to Origin. Grids. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. After the link is established. click Copy. 4 In the Project Browser. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model.rvt. however. and click Select Link. click (Copy/Monitor). select the linked Revit model.Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.

16 Click OK. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 18 Using the same method. select Levels 00 through 06. while pressing SHIFT. right-click Level 1. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 15 In the New Plan dialog.8 On the Options Bar. delete the Level 2 floor plan. and click Delete. select Multiple. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 9 In the drawing area. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. click OK. click Finish mode. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). for Floor Plan views. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. click Finish.

you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 24 In the New View Template dialog. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. First. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Name. enter Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. under Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. right-click. select the Topography : Surface. 19 In the Project Browser.Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. right-click. and click OK. 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

33 Click at the upper left of the grid. double-click Site. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 34 In the 3D view that displays.25 In the View Templates dialog. under Floor Plans. select Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Camera. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. under Names. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 26 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Floor Plans. click OK. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. and click OK.

Adding Floors In this exercise. and click OK.35 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors on page 92. enter To Building. and click Rename. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand 3D Views. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. 36 In the Rename View dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1.

such as roofs. At the top left corner of the grid. If the grid changes size. past the first vertical grid line. click Training Files. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Leave this dimension unlocked.To create floors. Some other Revit Architecture elements. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. You are now in the Sketch Editor. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_floors. click Lines. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Dimension. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. select the top floor line. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and railings are also created from sketches. On the Sketch tab. click (Rectangle). and then the first horizontal grid line. and elements in the current view display as gray. stairs. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. ■ Adding Floors | 93 . sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.rvt. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. In this exercise. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. double-click 01 Entry Level. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Floor.

4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. press ENTER. and change their values to 1'. and click the temporary dimension value. Enter 1'. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left dimension. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimension. click Modify. Do not lock the dimensions. select the top floor line. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 1'. At the top left corner of the grid. and then press ESC.

8 Select the floor.7 On the Design Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. ■ Adding Floors | 95 . click (Pick Lines). and press ESC. Next. click Quit Sketch. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. They display on the floor sketch. and for Offset. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. On the Sketch tab. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. double-click 02 Level. under Floor Plans. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Floor. On the Options Bar. on the Design Bar. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. using a different sketching technique. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. enter 5'.

12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown, and lock the dimensions.

13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Level. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 16 On the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Sketch tab, click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level, and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively, you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level, and lock the edges. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.

Adding Floors | 97

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 33 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 35 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 98.

Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.

98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_roof.rvt.

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar:

Clear Defines slope. Click (Pick Lines).

■ ■

For Offset, enter 6', and press ENTER.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

Adding a Roof | 99

6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

7 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1'. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines:
■ ■

On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep), and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area, select the roof.

Adding a Roof | 101

14 On the Options Bar, click

(Add new points to the slab shape).

15 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter -4'', and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.

Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof, on grid D, move the cursor down below the roof, and click to specify the section.

102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.

23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. In section, you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view, select the roof, and on the Options Bar, click 27 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Structure [1], select Variable. (Element Properties).

Adding a Roof | 103

The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 30 Click OK 3 times. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan, select the section line, and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog, click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Add swept fascias

36 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

37 If necessary, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 38 In the 3D view, zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. In this case, the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector, select Fascia - Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 41 Starting with the left front edge, moving counter-clockwise, select each edge.

104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 105.

Adding a Curtain Wall
In this exercise, you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid, so if you resize the grid, the curtain wall resizes with it.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 105

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.

Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront, and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. When you duplicate a type, you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. The type is saved in the project. 6 In the Name dialog, enter Retail Storefront, and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

(Element Properties).

Under Construction, for Join Condition, select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 7'. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 3’ 6''. Click OK twice.

8 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Level, select 01 Entry Level. For Height, select 05 Roof Garden. For Offset, enter 2'.

106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the first curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 2' from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend), and trim each curtain wall segment.

13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimensions, but opt to keep the constraints when prompted.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 107

15 On the View Control Bar, verify the view settings:
■ ■

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 108.

Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.

Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels, you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All. All the elements in the list are selected. 4 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None. 5 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters. 6 Click OK.

Creating an Entrance | 109

7 Zoom in to the entrance area, in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 9 Select 1 panel, press and hold CTRL, and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.

10 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

11 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 12 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 13 In the Apply View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK. 14 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 15 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Medium. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Creating an Entrance | 111

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South. 20 Zoom to the front of the building. 21 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

22 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.

23 On the Options Bar, click Add or Remove Segments. 24 Select the mullion that you selected previously, select another mullion to the right, and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

click Curtain Grid. 30 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. select Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. select One Segment. 32 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Modify. 31 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 113 . and unpin it.

34 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 On the View toolbar. and view the new entrance. 3rd. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press TAB until it is selected. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 114. select it. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 39 Optionally. 37 Press DELETE. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and unpin it. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 36 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 35 Zoom in to the first panel. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and 4th panels. open the North elevation. 38 Using the same process. click (Default 3D View).

under Graphics. select 02 Level. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Right-click in the view. 5 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. for Underlay. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . double-click 01 Entry Level. and click View Properties. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.

click Callout. 8 Select the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and click to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. which indicates you must draw the callout.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and click OK. and click Flip Section. click Section. 13 Select the section line. and click Rename. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . under Floor Plans. 14 Press ESC.9 In the Project Browser. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. right-click. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter Display Area. Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Draw a section line. as shown.

22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click Rename. select Finish Face: Exterior. right-click Section 1. Click (Rectangle). expand Sections (Building Section). and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 21 In the Type Selector. click Wall.16 Select the section box. 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. For Loc Line. select Basic Wall: Interior . and click OK. enter Section Display Area. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Rename View dialog.5 1/2'' Partition (1 hr). and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 17’ x 17’ square wall inside the grid lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

26 On the Design Bar. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. under Ceiling Plans. select Compound Ceiling: 2’ x 2’ ACT System. select Wall faces. and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. for Prefer. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space.24 On the Tools toolbar. click Dimension. Lock both alignments. 27 On the Options Bar. click (Align).) Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . 25 Press ESC twice. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Ceiling. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level.

enter 9'. 46 Press ESC. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. for Base Offset. and click OK. under Sections (Building Section). 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Constraints. Next. double-click Section Display Area. 38 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Ceiling Plans. for Height Offset From Level. 37 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. 47 In the Project Browser. enter 9'. and click to select the walls. double-click 01 Entry Level. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections. and click OK. click 43 On the Design Bar.36 Press ESC twice. click Modify. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. click to select it. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. (Element Properties). under Constraints. 41 On the Options Bar.

for Top/Base. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. click Edit. On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 49 In the Project Browser. for Structure. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . under Construction. and click . 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. Select the 02 Level Floor. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. click Attach. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. and click to select the walls. and press ESC. view the ceiling structure. click Edit/New.

55 In the Type Properties dialog.54 Click OK. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Cancel. click Cancel. click (Rotate). Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 123 . 61 Press ESC.60 Click. and press ENTER.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 125. 66 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows Off. click Shadows On. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 65 On the View Control Bar. 64 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser.

click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_stair. and click to create a reference plane to the left. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. Move the cursor over grid line B.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. double-click 01 Entry Level. and for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 5'. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and copy it to the 05 Level.rvt. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and click to create a reference plane to the right.

Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Select the left reference plane. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 7 Using the same method. shorten the right reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Modify. and 3. and specify a point to create first stair flight. click Stairs. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2.5 On the Design Bar. C.

The complete stair displays. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. including its handrails. 10 On the Options Bar. beyond the end of the stair. Move the cursor down. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair.8'' Masonry. and select the 2nd reference plane. 12 In the Type Selector.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and specify a point. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. ■ Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . select Basic Wall: Generic . Click (Rectangle). click Wall. with a message that 22 risers have been created and 0 remain. select Finish Face: Interior.

click Align. 18 Using the same technique. 15 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. and click to select it. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments.14 Draw walls around the stair. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. click Dimension. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Click Modify. 21 Select the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained. and press DELETE. 23 Select the stair. a warning displays. (Undo). 24 On the Standard toolbar. for Prefer. select Single-Flush : 36'' x 84''. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. enter 4'. select both reference planes. select Wall faces. and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar. click Door. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. and press ENTER. Select the interior face of the wall.20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. TIP To flip the door swing. select the dimension value. 27 In the Type Selector. 25 While pressing CTRL. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. Select the bottom of the stair. and specify a point away from the wall. Select the wall. The stair and walls move to the left. Lock the dimension. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 .

click 36 On the View toolbar.30 On the Design Bar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Element Properties). but if you view the top level of the building. select 00 Foundation. (Default 3D View). click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. 35 On the View toolbar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for Multistory Top Level. 33 Select the stair. click Modify. select all 4 walls. and move the cursor to spin the building model. for Base Constraint. (SteeringWheels). select 05 Roof Garden. Click OK. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Click OK. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected.

under Floor Plans. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Align. (Rectangle). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. and lock the alignment. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 131 . 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and lock the alignments. double-click 01 Entry Level. 46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 44 On the Tools toolbar. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser.

on the View toolbar.Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. for Base Offset. 55 In the Project Browser. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click see the roof. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. For Top Constraint. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click (Default 3D View). enter 1'. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. (Default 3D View). 56 Select the shaft. Under Constraints. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. (SteeringWheels). 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. By offsetting the base. (SteeringWheels). 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Up to Level: 06 Roof. click 59 On the View toolbar.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. 62 Proceed to the next exercise.61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 133.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click (Align). 5 In the Type Selector. and click View Properties. select Basic Wall: Generic . 2 Right-click in the view.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. under Floor Plans. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RRB_wall_profile. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. for Underlay. click Training Files. The exact placement is not important. and then select the right face of the wall. under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select 06 Roof. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .8'' Masonry. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.

17 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. click . 18 In the upper right corner of the profile. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and click (Circle). as shown: Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 135 . select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. enter 32' 6''. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. click Lines. and press ENTER. click Edit Profile. 15 In the error dialog. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. select Elevation: South. click . and click Open View.Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 14 Select the 12' 6'' vertical dimension value. 20 Draw a circle with a 4' radius just below the fillet arc. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Remove Constraints. and click (Fillet arc).

136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}.21 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click Finish Sketch.

create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.rvt. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 137. click Component. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. and open Imperial\i_RRB_host. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. between grid lines C and D. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP After you place the 1st planter. select Planter : 48'' x 48''. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. click Component. 14 In the Name dialog. and then click OK twice. select the 2 remaining trees. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. (Element Properties). click (Default 3D View). enter Japanese Cherry 5'.5 On the Basics tab. under Dimensions. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and click OK. as shown. 8 On the View toolbar.15'. enter 5'. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 While pressing CTRL. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select RPC Tree . for Type. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Deciduous: Japanese Cherry . select RPC Tree Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 5'. 16 Click Apply. for Height. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. View the roof. 11 Select one of the trees. and in the Type Selector. and press ESC twice. under Floor Plans.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . under 3D Views. enter 8'. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click to place the line. click Floor. For Offset. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 25 Using the same method. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click {3D}.18 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 8' below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click Lines.

28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. move the cursor to the right approximately 4'. 32 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 3'. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. enter 0'. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 30 On the Options Bar. clear Chain.26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to finish the line. and click to sketch a line.

35 Select the line between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . The completed sidewalk displays.33 On the Tools toolbar. 37 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. click Finish Sketch. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 36 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 34 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.

Next. When you render an image. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 41 In the Name dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 45 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. select Rotate after placement. near Column E5. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter Sidewalk. select RPC Male: Alex. 47 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. click 40 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 On the Options Bar. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 42 Click OK twice. for Type. 49 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. under Constraints. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height Offset from Level. 44 Click OK. and click so he is facing the column. click Duplicate. 50 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. a photorealistic image displays. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. click Edit/New. 38 Select the sidewalk. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. as shown: (Element Properties). enter -0' 6''. In plan view.

54 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.NOTE If necessary. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 143 . 53 In the Type Selector. 52 Move the cursor clockwise. select RPC Female: Cathy. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 55 Press ESC twice. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. select RPC Beetle. about 30 degrees. 51 In the Type Selector.

you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a host for a component.56 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. Next. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under Constraints. click Camera. and click (Element Properties). double-click West. Select a host for the RPC components 61 Select Cathy. 60 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and on the Options Bar. for Offset. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 In the camera view (3D View 1). click Pick Host. click the car. under Elevations. 59 In the Project Browser. enter -1'. and click OK. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and on the Options Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 145. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. double-click To Building. click Pick Host. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . If the sidewalk changes height. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.62 Click the sidewalk. 65 Using the same method. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. 64 Click the sidewalk. and replace them with a service core. 63 Select Alex. View the front of the building 66 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and shaft opening. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files.rvt. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. After the service core is positioned. In the left pane of the Open dialog.The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_service_core_. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . walls. under Floor Plans. including the stairs.

9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 147 . and open Imperial\i_RRB_core. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. 5 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). click 6 On the View toolbar.rvt. click OK. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.4 Press DELETE. click Training Files. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.

double-click 00 Foundation. 14 In the Project Browser. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and notice that the linked file is listed. right-click i_RRB_core. and click Create Instance. 13 In the drawing area. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. Click the inner top horizontal floor line. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify.Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and on the Design Bar. and zoom in to the linked instance. expand Model. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. 11 In the Project Browser. click 16 Align the core: ■ ■ (Align).

(SteeringWheels). 18 Select the core. and on the Options Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. or if the group layout is expected to change. 20 On the View toolbar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center. click Modify. click (top down view). 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Ungroup. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. (Default 3D View). 17 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Click grid line C. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 149 .

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 150. where it is hosted within a railing family. and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. expand Renderings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.rvt. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Conference project.22 Proceed to the final exercise. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. After you modify it. click Training Files.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and open Imperial\i_Conference. in the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. The rendering displays. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Families. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 8 In the Project Browser. and expand Railings. Handrail only. verify that Chain is not selected. and Parapet. 18 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and on the Options Bar. click OK. double-click 02 Level. click Lines. click Edit. The floor sketch displays. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 5 Expand Railing. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 7 Click Window menu ➤ i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Modify. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 2' to the left of grid line C.rvt. click (Split). and click to split the floor. press and hold CTRL. and select Glass. 15 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically until the line is 5' long. 25 Select grid line B. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 27 On the Tools toolbar. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically 5'. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click (Align). 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched.19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Align). and click the lock to lock the alignment. 26 Select grid line D. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor horizontally to the right 5'. and lock the alignment. and click the lock to lock the alignment.

31 In the Revit dialog.29 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 153 . enter 4''. Lock the dimensions. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Dimension. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. select Glass. for Type. and click OK. click Railing. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).rvt project. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 33 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. 154 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar.

You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 155 .

156 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. NOTE For training purposes. lofty ceilings. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. and a roof garden. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. 157 . exterior fire stairs. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors.

158 .

and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. section. 159 .Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. elevation. You learn how to create new views from existing views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you learn how to create views from a building model. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. including plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Level 2. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 161 . and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

enter Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans.

click the current scale. Duplicating Plan Views | 163 . hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Next. and click 1''= 80'-0''.14 On the View Control Bar.

All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .16 Right-click.

under Floor Plans. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Elevation: Building Elevation. click Elevation. for Scale.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select 1/8''=1'-0''. 3 In the Type Selector.

click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

11 In the Project Browser. enter South East. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 167 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. for Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. under Views (all). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. expand Floor Plans. select 1/8''=1'-0''. double-click South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 15 On the Options Bar.

and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 169 . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment. and click to place it.

and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. 24 Select gridline F. click Modify. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). using the blue circular drag grip. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click Section 1.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 171 . click Modify.

172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1/4"=1'-0''.Resulting callout view .rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 3 In the Type Selector. click Callout. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Scale. select Floor Plan. double-click Level 1.

click Modify. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 173 .

■ Select the middle grip. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 7 On the Design Bar. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

for Scale. 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. under Sections (Building Sections). Creating Callout Views | 175 . ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. double-click Section 1.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Callout.

Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 18 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Details). and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 177 . Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. the elevation markers.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.

select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. . click Duplicate. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and can be applied to the section line. double-click Level 1. 12 For Section Tag. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. click Load into Project. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 4 On the Design Bar. select the current project. and click Open. select Custom-Section Head.Filled. 10 On the floor plan. clear any others. select Section Head .Custom. click Edit/New.rfa. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK twice. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. for Section Head. Section Tail – Filled.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog.rvt. under Floor Plans. Section Tail . enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select the section line. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Circle.rfa. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Edit/New. scroll to Section Marks. 15 Under Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. On the floor plan. click Duplicate. Click OK. enter 3/4'' Circle. and click Open. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3/4'' Circle. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 179 . open Imperial\Families\Annotations. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. and select 3. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Line. 19 Click OK. for Elevation Tag. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. For Line Weight. click Training Files. notice the circular elevation markers that display. select Custom-Callout Head. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select 3.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 17 Under Category. On the floor plan. and on the Options Bar. and select 2. 22 In the Name dialog. . enter 3/4''. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 27 Click OK twice. and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.

enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. click Duplicate. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 43 Under Category. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 36 In the drawing. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. enter 1/4''. click Load into Project. 39 Click OK twice.30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select the current project. . and click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. clear all others. scroll down to Callout Boundary. For Corner Radius. and select 7. 40 Press ESC. and click OK. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 34 In the Name dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. select the callout. click the Annotation Objects tab.

expand Callout Boundary. and select 4. click Training Files. and apply it to multiple elevation views. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 46 Under Category. masking regions. You learn to create view templates. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 49 Click OK. To accomplish this. and visual overrides. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 181 . The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.45 For Line Pattern. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. view regions. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. select Dash. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.rvt. filters.

clear Entourage. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. The crop region displays as red. 4 On the View Control Bar.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Elevations. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Zoom to Fit. and double-click East. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. under Visibility. 5 On the View Toolbar. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

15 In the View Templates dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 16 In the Project Browser. levels. grids. under Elevations. 12 On the View Control bar. and section lines are now hidden in the view. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation.10 Under Visibility. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating a View Template | 183 . and click OK. click OK. Callouts. and click Create View Template From View. elevation markers. 14 In the New View Template dialog. double-click North. under Elevations. right-click East. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK.

Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 19 Using the same method.17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. click Apply. double-click Penthouse. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 18 In the Select View Template dialog.rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. and click OK. edit the crop region as before. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.rvt. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. right-click North. 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

2 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. double-click Roof Plan. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for View Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. View Range and Plan Regions | 185 . select Penthouse. for Bottom. under Floor Plans. Under View Depth. under Extents. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Below (Level 4). and click Properties. right-click. select Level Below (Level 4). for Level. click Edit.

select Level 4. for View Range. and click Properties. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Roof Plan. for Bottom.6 In the Project Browser. click Plan Region. for Level. under Extents. click Lines. right-click. click Edit. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4.

click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. select Unlimited. 17 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. Move you cursor diagonally. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. in this case. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. click Edit. click Region Properties.11 On the Options Bar. for Bottom. In the left corner of the building. under Extents. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 187 . click Modify. Under View Depth. for View Range. select Unlimited. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select the left endpoint of the outer wall.

10 On the Filter tab. select Fire Rating. and click OK. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. select Walls. 9 Click OK.rating of the walls. 14 In the Color dialog. After you apply the filter. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 11 Select Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. under Filters. Enter Hr. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. for Rated Walls. enter Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. under Projection/Surface. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. under Categories. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Basic colors. for Color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. expand Floor Plans. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click (New). 12 On the Filter tab. and apply a color. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Filters dialog. select the red color. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Edit/New. and click OK. Select contains. for Pattern. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. and click OK. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click <No Override>. click the Filters tab. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 16 Click OK. select Solid Fill. click Add. under Views (all). 7 In the Filters dialog.

Masking Portions of a View | 189 . The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click OK.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Remove. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK.

190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 5 On the View menu. as shown. 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. under Floor Plans. right-click. and click Rename. click Show Crop Region.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rvt.

Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Masking Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 11 In the Type Selector. click (Rectangle). select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Masking Portions of a View | 191 . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 8 Select the crop region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.7 On the View menu.

15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. under Floor Plans. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.Level 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 1 In the Project Browser.

for Pattern. and click 1/4''=1'0''. select Solid fill. right-click. right-click. for Color. 7 Under Cut. 11 Click OK twice. and click Override. select Walls. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. Working with Visual Overrides | 193 . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. click in the Patterns field. under Visibility. and click Rename. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. click the current scale. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. clear Grids. and click OK.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Visibility. clear Floors. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Under Visibility. 18 Right-click.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Color. and click OK. under Lines. By using the previous method to make the selection. 23 In the Color dialog. click Override. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 25 Click OK twice. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 195 . 20 Right-click.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. select Dash 1/16''. click a purple color. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Pattern. 21 Under Projection/Surface.

30 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 For Color. right-click. click Modify. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 29 In the Color dialog. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. click . click Projection Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select the sofa.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan.

Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. right-click. how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 197 . 33 On the View Control Bar.32 Select one of the lamps. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.

A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click View. right-click.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt.

For Sheet Number. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Creating Drawing Sheets | 199 . For Sheet Name. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify. 5 When the title block highlights. Click OK. enter Site Plan. on the Options Bar. enter A101. expand Sheets (all). 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101.Unnamed. and select the title block.

enter Freighthouse Flats. Smith. 2009. click Edit. for Project Address. enter 15 May. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 2009-1. For Project Status. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Client Name. 14 Click OK. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. under Other. For Project Number. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter J. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter For Approval.

17 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Elevations A106 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you add views to these sheets. for Name. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Stairs In the following exercise. select the new sheet name.Elevations A107 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK.rvt. and click Rename.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Sections A108 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Layout Plan A104 . and click Save.rvt. enter Floor Plan.Elevations A105 . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Adding Views to Sheets | 201 . and click OK.

double-click A104 .Elevations. 6 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Floor Plan.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. and click to place the view. and click to place it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. double-click A102 . 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Sheets (all). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar. The red border around the view no longer displays.

and click to place it. and click to place it. double-click A107 . Adding Views to Sheets | 203 . drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.Sections. and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

double-click A108 . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. . and click OK. zoom in to the grip. 18 Under Floor Plans. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. click Modify. for View Scale. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.Stairs. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). 16 Select title bar. and on the Options Bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. move the cursor over it. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. and press TAB until it highlights. and click to place it. 19 On the Design Bar.

you must first activate the view on the sheet. In order to do this. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. and then make changes and deactivate the view. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 205 . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. under Floor Plans. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.Sections. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. and click Activate View. and press ENTER. enter 54'.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. right-click.rvt. 2 Select the building section view. click Modify. double-click A107 .

double-click North.6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 7 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 207 . and click Deactivate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Click OK. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. For Sheet Name. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. After you create the sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. and click Properties. double-click Level 1. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The camera view displays. right-click. You modify the view to hide the view title. enter Title Sheet. enter T. under Floor Plans. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt. click Camera. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. select the new sheet name. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 208 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

For Far Clip Offset. Under Extents. enter 5'. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. Under Camera. enter 420'. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 60'. For Target Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 209 .

and then click OK. under Sheets (all). select Scale (locked proportions). on the Options Bar. 15 With the view selected. double-click T . 210 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 Under 3D Views.13 In the Project Browser. Click Apply. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter 25''. for Height. click Size. Under Model Crop Size.Title Sheet. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.

and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify. . and close the exercise file. under Graphics. click Edit/New. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. select No. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 211 . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. enter Viewport/no title mark. for Show title. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet.

212 .

rvt. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. You also learn to create different types of schedules. 213 . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. such as room and window schedules. Tagging Objects In this lesson. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as doors and windows. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. Because of the open style floor plan. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. click Training Files.

as shown: 5 Using the same method. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. click Room Separation. as shown: 214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 215 . click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method.

and press ENTER. 216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rfa. click it. indicating that it can be edited. type 8'. click Modify. click Room. and click to place the room and tag. 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click OK. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The room tag number displays in blue. type U18-1. 14 For Offset. and select the room tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 16 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Click to place the new room and tag. 23 Using the same method. type Kitchen. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. click Modify. and press ENTER. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. Dining.18 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 217 . click Room. type Entry. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. place rooms and tags.

Level 2. 29 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise. 218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). clear Room Separation. click Modify. The rooms are already placed. but they need to be tagged. click Room Tag. on the Model Categories tab. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 On the Design Bar. expand Lines.

4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 219 . 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to place door and window tags. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Project Browser.Level 1.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. clear Leader.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. under Identify Data. and click OK. click Properties). and on the Options Bar.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. for Mark. 220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type U18-1. click Modify. type U18-2. and press ENTER.

rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. Tagging Doors and Windows | 221 . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. and click OK. select Window Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. click Load. and double-click Level 1. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.rfa. 20 In the Tags dialog. 222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Tag All Not Tagged. click OK. 15 Under Category. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. verify that All objects in current view is selected.Level 2. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK.

4 Select a dining room chair. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Under Floor Plans. and modify the tag placement and display. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag.rfa.Level 1. click Tag ➤ By Category. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects | 223 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. double-click Level 2. select the edge to which the leader connects. 29 Save the file. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. select Leader. tag all untagged windows. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Yes to load a tag. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method. click Training Files.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click the elbow control. 14 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 11 Select the tag for the table. 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. clear Leader. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and drag it above the chair tag.8 Select the furniture in the living room. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.

All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.Level 2. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. 18 On the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Furniture Tag : Standard. Tagging Other Objects | 225 . and on the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. and click OK.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 23 Save the file. you learn to add schedules. and click Modify. and click OK. select Furniture Tags.20 On the Options Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. click (Filter Selection). 22 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Filter dialog. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 227 . a schedule that lists every window in the building. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in which windows are listed by window type. Finally. Next. that is. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. 228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. and click View. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Under Available fields. right-click in the Design Bar. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields.rvt. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 Using the same method. click Schedule/Quantities. 4 For Name. select Windows. 9 Click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Comments and click Add. and double-click Level 1. click the Fields tab. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. type Building Window Schedule. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. expand Floor Plans. under Category.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. you are prompted to open one that does. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. this can be a time-consuming process. and click View Properties. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Close. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. click Show.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Window Schedule | 229 . 13 In the Project Browser. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. right-click the schedule. However. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. in large building models with many views. expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE By clicking Show.

under Other. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. and press ENTER. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog.15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. The window schedule is displayed. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. sorted by type mark. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. click Edit. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. clear Itemize every instance. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 23 Click OK twice. under Other. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. for Sorting/Grouping.

rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. under Floor Plans. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and sill conditions for a window can be found. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 231 . 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Schedules/Quantities. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. you cannot use them to tag objects. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. jamb.rvt. double-click Level 2. unlike shared parameters. In this case.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. and double-click Building Window Schedule.

under Other. for Name. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Using the same method. select Construction.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click OK. type Head Detail. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. under Available fields. Select Type. 12 Click OK twice. click Add to create the new parameter. select the following fields. click Edit. for Fields. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data. and click Properties. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. 5 Click OK. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . so that they are listed before Comments. right-click Building Window Schedule. For Group parameter under.

click Schedule/Quantities.Door Schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. click in the Head Detail header. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. type 1/A107.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Jamb Detail. type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Head Detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Head Detail. Jamb Detail. click Group. and without releasing the left mouse button.Level 1. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. 17 Save the file. under Type Mark A. type 3/A107. type Unit 18 . and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. You then hide the column used for the filter. For example. TIP To select all 3 headers. type 2/A107. select Doors. and Sill Detail. expand Floor Plans. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 233 .rvt. and for Sill Detail. Under Name.

Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Select contains in the second field. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Mark. 6 Under Available fields. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. 10 Under Fields. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. but is not included as a column in the schedule. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Type U18 in the third field. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule.■ For Phase. select Hidden field. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. select the following fields. click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. verify that New Construction is selected. 11 Under Field formatting.Unit 18. select Family and Type. 9 Click the Formatting tab. and double-click A102 . 4 Click OK. and click OK. expand Sheets (all).

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 235 .13 In the Project Browser.Door Schedule. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. click Modify. click Unit 18 . 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 15 On the Design Bar. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. and drag it to the sheet. click Modify.

5 Using the same method. select Bold. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. select Number. 7 Under Text. 8 Click OK. under Category. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. right-click in the Design Bar. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. to the right of Header text. double-click Level 1. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. and click View. under Available fields. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. and click OK.20 Save the file. select Rooms. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 237 . 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 103. click New.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. type Building Entry. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. type Stair. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. select Storage. type Storage. next to Rows. The room Number is U17-46. for room 101. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and press ENTER. type Corridor. For 105. 101-106. select Corridor. For 102. for Name. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. For 106. For 104.

and modify room names. For Weight. 4 Click OK twice. expand Lines. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. under Projection/Surface. place rooms from a program list. double-click Level 1. click the bright green swatch. and click OK. draw the horizontal line. click the Lines field. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Color field. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Room Separation. In the Line Graphics dialog. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. In the Lines field. under Visibility. click Override. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select 9. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you add room separation lines.rvt.13 Save the file. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. First. Under Custom colors. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click Room Separation.

8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Modify. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 239 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

select 101 Building Entry. for Room. select 102 Storage. for Room. 14 For Offset. type 8'. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Room Schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 19 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the Corridor. place the following rooms. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Level 1. 20 While pressing CTRL. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 241 . 16 Using the same method. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar.

under Constraints. type As Selected. 31 For Key Name. for Rows. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click New. under Category. click 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 27 Select Schedule keys. and for all 3 finishes. and click OK. and Wall Finish. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. select Rooms. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. Floor Finish. under Available fields. and click Add. type Units. clear Room Bounding. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 24 Open the Room Schedule. select Base Finish. (Element Properties). while pressing CTRL. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar.21 On the Options Bar.

under Other. select Units. 44 On the Options Bar. 42 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 33 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 243 . click (Filter Selection). for Available fields. under Identity Data. for Fields. 36 Click OK twice. for Room Style. and click Properties. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 38 Under U17-8. right-click Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. click Edit. and click Add. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Room Style. click (Element Properties). 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Rooms. for Room Style. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 43 In the Filter dialog. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click Check None. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.32 Using the same method. select Units. under Floor Plans.

and click Properties.rvt. under Floor Plans. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. and double-click Level 1. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . For rooms 102 and 105. for Color. select Service. under Views (all). and click OK. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. type Room Type. 104. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. click the Color Scheme field. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. (Duplicate). right-click Level 1. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 103. select Public. select Room Style. under Graphics. click OK. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. and 106. click 5 For Title. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan).46 Open the Room Schedule. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. at the warning prompt. 48 Save the file. for Name. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes.

under Schemes. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. click the value in the Color column. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . click Edit Color Scheme. click Color Scheme Legend. select Room Type.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Modify. and clear Room Separation. clear Visible. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 14 Click OK twice. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. expand Lines. click Edit. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 19 On the Options Bar. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. under Visibility. select the color legend.

for Size. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Swatch Width. respectively. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. (Element Properties). 23 Using the same method. 29 Click OK twice. 24 Click OK. select blue. and click OK. click Modify. 28 Under Title Text. type 1/4''. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. type 1''.22 In the Color dialog. and select Show Title. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. under Custom color. under Graphics. 30 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Edit/New.

Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. double-click Building Section. under Visibility. right-click Building Section. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. click Edit. for Color Scheme. and select Properties. click Color Scheme Legend. select Rooms. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. under Sections. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 247 . Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. under Sections. select Room Type. and click OK. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 35 Click OK twice. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Graphics.

click Check None. and click OK. and click OK. for Room Style. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Units.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Rooms. under Identity Data. for Room Style. 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 46 Click . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). click . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). select Public. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. under Identity Data. 41 On the Options Bar.

under Schedules/Quantities. and click . excluding the stairwell spaces. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. under Key Name for the new row. 54 While pressing CTRL. double-click Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. type Suites. select Service. and click OK. for Rows.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Identity Data. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 249 . click New. for Room Style. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar.

61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.55 Click . 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 59 Under Room Area Computation. for Room Style. select Suites. select Areas and Volumes. but not beyond it. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. under Volume Computations. The color fill extends to the roof. verify that At wall finish is selected. under Identity Data. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select the room on the left side of the top floor. and click OK. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. The color fill will extend to the roof.

70 For Limit Offset. . select the stairwell room. the dining room. 68 Click . and click 65 For Limit Offset. select Loft. 67 On the first level. under Constraints. and the living room. 66 Click OK. 72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. click Modify. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. type -10”. 71 Click OK. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. type 0’ 0” . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 251 . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). select Level 2.

rvt. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.73 Save the file. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click {3D}. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

and click Add. under Category. select Material: Description. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.EPDM.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 9 Using the same method. Creating a Material Takeoff | 253 . Select Grand totals. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. click Modify. select Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL. select Roofs. Clear Itemize every instance. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. under Available fields. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 4 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Family and Type. For Then by.

and click Add. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Material: Area. for Material: Cost. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. click the Formatting tab. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.25 4. type Estimated Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and click Properties. select Calculate totals. click Edit. under Available fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. under Other. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 12 Click OK. and click OK twice. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). for Name. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. select Material: Cost. click Estimated Cost. Under Field formatting. 23 For Field formatting. 19 For Type. and under Fields. for Fields.75 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 21 Click OK. 20 For Formula. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Currency. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.50 1. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1.

for Rounding.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. 29 Select Use digit grouping. you create an exiting plan for the building. for Currency. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 255 .Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . you create a shared parameter file. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. not just for currency. which inserts commas after every three digits. and are defined and stored in an external file. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. select $. ensuring consistency across families and projects. regardless of category. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and reporting the shared parameters. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. adding the shared parameters to a family. can be used for any number-based parameter. Digit grouping. either within family components or within the project template. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. and schedule the total distance of each path. 28 For Unit symbol. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. tag the line. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 27 In the Format dialog. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 31 Save the file. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 30 Click OK twice. In this lesson. click the Format value. These shared parameters can be added to any family. You draw a travel path line.

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. click New. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 11 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. click New. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Length. and click OK. type Exiting. click New. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. type Path ID. type OfficeStandardsParameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Name. type Travel Distance.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.txt.rvt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Training Files. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for Name. and click Save. for File name. under Groups. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click Create. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Type of Parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Under Parameters. for Name. 7 Under Parameters.rvt.

14 On the Design Bar. in the Load into Projects dialog. click Add. and click OK.rvt. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. If you have multiple projects open. 10 Using the same method. under Parameters. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. click Load into Projects. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 257 . 11 Click OK. and click OK.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. under Dimensions. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Constraints. and click OK. click Family Types. under Parameter Type. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 13 Click Apply. select Shared parameter.rvt. following the equals symbol (=). Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Travel Distance Formula. under Parameter Data.rfa. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. group it under Dimensions. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 15 If necessary. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. and select Instance. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. type Length. click Add. and click Select. under Parameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Click Training Files. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Group parameter under. 8 Select Instance.

click Training Files. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. 24 Click OK twice. click Label. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and click OK. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. click (Add Parameter).rft. click Label. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. under Category Parameters. 19 On the Design Bar. click Select. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Travel Distance. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click parameter(s) to label).

select Path ID. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 33 On the Design Bar. and move it down. and click OK. and press DELETE. and click Save. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rvt is selected. for File Name.rfa. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 29 In the drawing window. 32 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. click Load into Projects. type Travel Distance Tag. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 259 .28 On the Design Bar. 35 Save the file.

and click in the center of the corridor. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Exiting Plan .Tagging. 6 Move the cursor to the right.Placing. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. above the exterior door as shown. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. After the lines are tagged. select Chain. 4 On the Options Bar. click Component.Level 1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. under Floor Plans.

click Modify. under Constraints. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner.7 Move the cursor down. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. for Path ID. type 1-1. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. double click Exiting Plan . verify that Chain is selected. through the door. and click OK. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Component. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. 8 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 12 On the Design Bar. and click outside of the building. Placing. under Floor Plans. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.Level 2. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 261 . select the 2 dashed travel lines. clear Leader.

and click in the stair. move the cursor to the left. and click. and click above the door to the stair. 23 Move the cursor down. click Component.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 262 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 30 Using the same method.Tagging.24 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Category. type 2-1. Placing. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 263 . click Modify. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. . for Path ID. type Level 1 Exit Distance. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL.

47 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 49 Click OK twice. under Schedules/Quantities. select Path ID. under Available fields. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and under Field formatting. 35 Click the Filter tab. select Travel Distance. in the first field. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click Add. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the second field. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. in the third field. 50 Save the file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 41 Under Fields. 38 For Sort by. type 1-. for Filter by. 42 Click OK. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. type 2-. click Edit. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Rename. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Calculate totals. select contains. 36 For Filter by. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 264 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 44 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and in the third field. click Training Files. select Path ID. 45 In the Rename View dialog. for Filter.rvt. under Other. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. type Level 2 Exit Distance. while pressing CTRL. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click OK. 43 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson.

Partitions ➤ C1010100 . and click Properties. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Partitions . right-click Generic . right-click the Design Bar. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 9 Click OK twice.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Walls. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Fixed Partitions. and click View. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 265 . 10 In the schedule. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 4 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Identity Data. under Categories. click the Value field.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Assembly Code. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and select C1010145 . expand C . and click . click the Fields tab.Interiors ➤ C10 . select the following fields.6''.

9 Under Directories.11 Close the exercise file. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click OK. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. click Create. and click OK to create the database. select a location for the database file. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. the database display may be different than that shown. click the File Data Source tab. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 1 On the File menu.mdb). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Next. 3 Click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Database Name. 6 Click Finish. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.rvt. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 266 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. type Revit_Project.mdb. and click Next. click Training Files. under Database. 11 Click OK 3 times. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 8 In the New Database dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access.

A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Additionally.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 13 Close the exercise file. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 267 . For example. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. in addition to the Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports.

268 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 269 . or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'.

the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. 270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'.

However.rvt. and click OK. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. Under Constraints. click Training Files.Shared Elevation. 8 Select the Level 1 line. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. for Elevation Base. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 3 On the Options Bar. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. Relocating a Project | 271 . In the Name dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). type 1/4'' Head . Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The levels in the project are not shared. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. select Shared. If you did that now. expand Views (all). click (Element Properties). and double-click South. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK twice. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. click Edit/New. to better demonstrate how shared levels work.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. 13 On the Design Bar. type 325'. select Level : 1/4'' Head . By typing 325' in this step. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The south elevation is displayed. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.Shared Elevation.By selecting the Level 1 line. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. click Modify. and press ENTER. The base elevation now reads 325'. 272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 12 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 14 In the Project Browser. Relocating a Project | 273 .The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. and the Roof Plan level. as well as other views of the building model. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. the Penthouse level. under Elevations. select Levels 2-4. double-click North.

Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. In Revit Architecture. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. 16 If you want to save your changes. permanent dimensions are created automatically. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.Shared Elevation.■ ■ In the Type Selector. Dimensioning on page 274. In this case. and angular dimensions. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Dimensioning In this lesson. 274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. select Level : 1/4'' Head . Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. radial. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. multi-segmented. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. You place linear.

snap to wall centerlines. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Dimension. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. By default. dimensions are aligned. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and are created by selecting individual reference points.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. select it. Creating Dimensions | 275 . 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. and click to place the dimension. 276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 5 Move the cursor above the view.

7 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 277 . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. and select it.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. The lock displays as locked. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

select Wall Faces. select the right endpoint of the planter. 12 On the Options Bar. for Prefer. 278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and select its left exterior face. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 14 Move the cursor to the right. 16 Move the cursor up. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. above the plan view of the building. select the right side of the curtain wall. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter.11 Using the same method. but below the first dimension that you placed.

click Modify. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. for Dimension String Type. and click OK. 27 Click OK twice. 22 In the Name dialog. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Basics tab.Baseline. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. under Graphics.3/32" Arial . enter Linear . click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . .Ordinate. enter Linear . Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 279 . The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. and click OK.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Dimension String Type. select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. select Ordinate. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. 30 In the Type Selector.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. select Linear . select Linear . for Below.3/32" Arial . 33 Under Text Fields. for example Text dialog displays. enter Planter.29 Select the dimension string. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. to the left. verify that Use Actual Value is selected.Baseline. and in the Type Selector. 34 Click OK. below. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. . or to the right of a permanent dimension value.

40 Move the cursor outside the wall. and specify a point to place the dimension.35 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall faces. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 37 On the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 281 . and select it. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. click Modify. For Prefer.

. and click OK. for Suffix. 44 With the dimension still selected. type Typ. 282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the dimension text. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.42 Select the radial dimension. click Modify. 46 On the Basics tab. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog.

click Dimension.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. For Prefer. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. Creating Dimensions | 283 . verify that Wall faces is selected. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 50 Select the horizontal line. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 53 On the Basics tab. click Modify. expand Views (all). instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 284. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and click to place the dimension. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . When you dimension the wall. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you select only the wall. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Click Options. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. click Dimension.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 285 . These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. and click to place the automatic dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick. select Openings. Click OK. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and select Widths. select Wall centerlines.

Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions. 286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . Controlling Witness Lines on page 286. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. in some cases. However. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. click Modify. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. For example.7 On the Basics tab. for a multi-segmented dimension.

verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick. Controlling Witness Lines | 287 . 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. select Individual References.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. and select it.

7 Using the same method. move the cursor down. 10 Using the same method. and select it. 288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the right edge of the planter. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the bottom right endpoint. and click to place the dimension. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. select Wall centerlines. Controlling Witness Lines | 289 . for Prefer. and when the wall centerline highlights. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. select it. click Dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension.11 Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar.

and drag the dimension down the wall. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 18 While pressing SHIFT. 290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 16 On the Design Bar.15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. and click to place the dimension. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 19 Release SHIFT. click Modify.

drag it to the right. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. text font. click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 291 . After you create the new family type. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. you change the dimension tick mark. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 291. and using the same methods.20 Click the blue middle grip.

zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 5 In the Name dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. 2 Click (Element Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Tick Mark. type Office Standard. and select the lower dimension. click Duplicate. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 293 .■ ■ Under Text. 10 On the Basics tab. 7 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. for Text Size. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and select the bottom dimension. 9 In the Type Selector. For Text Font. type 1/8”. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. click Modify. ■ Click OK twice. select CityBlueprint. select another font.

You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. 294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and how to add leaders to the text notes. Creating Text Annotation on page 294. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. create a new angular dimension type. 12 Proceed to the next lesson.11 Using the same method. select the angular dimension on the planter. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295 . 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (None). click Text. for Leader. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. but below the upper dimension string. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. and click and drag to create a text box.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.

8 In the Element Properties dialog box. type EXISTING BUILDING. and click OK. select Arc Leaders. click Edit/New. under Graphics. and click OK. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 10 In the Name dialog box. for Text Size. type 1/4''. If so. and click . and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Under Text. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.5 In the text box. click Modify. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 296 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 7 Select the text box.

A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 297 .Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. and type Planting Bed. click Modify. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 15 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader).

click Edit/New.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 24 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. type Standard Notes. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select CityBlueprint. Click Rename. Under Graphics. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. and click OK. click Modify. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. for New. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Under Text. for Leader Arrowhead. 298 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. for Text Font. In the Rename dialog. 20 On the Design Bar.

26 In the Type Selector.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. and type 18'' Conc. Wall. click Text. 31 Click in the text box. and click Modify. click to place the text box. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click (Arc). for Leader. over the Planting Bed text. 27 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 299 . select Text: Standard Notes. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.32 If you want to save your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 300 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. In the callout view. 301 . you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. add detail components. In order to detail from the building model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. plywood. you trace over the building model geometry. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and metal studs. like a standard door header condition. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial.

click Training Files. as well as detail lines. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. and click Open. click Training Files. you detail the view of the roof edge. The roof overhang detail displays. and insulation objects. select As underlay. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 5 In the alert dialog. After you add components. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Exact location is not important. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. region objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. which means that all detail components. They are also view specific. You load detail components. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.rvt. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Detailing the View In this exercise. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rfa. 7 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. double-click the detail callout head. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

16 Click OK twice. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 13 In the Name dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 4". 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click (Element Properties). click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Duplicate. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.8 Delete the component. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. select Corrugated Metal. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Detailing the View | 303 .

and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. and on the Edit toolbar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Load.rfa. click Training Files. click (Move). click Modify. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing .19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. click Detail Component. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.

select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file.Because you still have several components to load. click Training Files. Detailing the View | 305 . and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click OK. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. 31 To properly orient the component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Open. click Detail Component.rvt. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.

click the Flip instance arrows.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify.

Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. select to near side. Detailing the View | 307 . and on the Edit toolbar. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. as shown. enter 5 1/2". click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. (Move).

Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. click Detail Component.■ Click Modify. 51 Click Modify. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. as shown. 47 In the Type Selector. 45 In the Type Selector. and lock the component.

Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. meaning they display only in this view. enter 1/4". Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Like detail components. select Thin Lines. you add lines to your detail. as shown. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines on page 309. click Detail Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 2 In the Type Selector.52 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Thin Lines. For Offset.rvt. click Detail Lines. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines | 309 . 7 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. and press ENTER. 4 Click Modify.

10 On the Design Bar. select Chain. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. click (Draw). 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 In the Type Selector. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. and press ENTER. For Offset. as shown. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and clear Chain. enter 1/4". and draw the detail lines as shown.

draw the detail lines as shown. and click OK. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select the Penthouse level line. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you turn the display model off. Adding Detail Lines | 311 . and click Properties. right-click. select Do not display.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 22 In the Project Browser. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Thin Lines. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 18 In the Type Selector. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

For Offset. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. enter 1/2". click Detail Lines. 30 In the Type Selector. select Break Line. 29 On the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 26 In the Type Selector. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. and press ENTER. click Detail Component. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Adding Text Notes | 313 . click Dimension. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. Adding Text Notes on page 313. Enter the text. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.32 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. and click to place the dimension.

Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click.rvt. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Text Fields. enter Typ. and click Rename. and press DELETE. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and save the exercise file. 8 Select the dimension line.Keynotes. Creating Detail Components on page 314. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. right-click. select a text note. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click the dimension text. and click OK. click Select All Instances. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 11 Proceed to the next exercise. for Suffix. (Filter Selection). Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click 6 In the Filter dialog.7 Click Modify. on the Options Bar. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail.. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. 7 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain. 16 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select all the coping linework. select Medium Lines. while pressing CTRL. pressing TAB. 15 Use a window to select all linework.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. and click Open. 14 Click Modify. in the Type Selector.rft. Creating Detail Components | 315 . You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. click Training Files. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.

316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Training Files. select the coping. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. delete the underlying linework. 21 To place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 18 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . clear Detail Items. 25 In the Filter dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. for File name. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. and click Open. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.Keynotes view is not the open view. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. The original linework remains selected. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 26 Press DELETE. enter Roof Edge. 23 Using a window. and the component can be placed in the detail. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Keynotes on page 317. and click Save. and click OK. 30 In the drawing area. 27 On the Design Bar. click .rfa. While pressing SHIFT. 22 Click Modify. navigate to your preferred location. click Detail Component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 3/4" Plywood.B5. For the metal coping. In the Keynotes dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. Adding Keynotes | 317 . and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them.C1. and click Open. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Click to place the leader arm. click Training Files. click Keynote ➤ Element. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Roof Edge4.rfa.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. use keynote 07645. use keynote 06160.D11. you place keynotes on objects. and click OK.rvt. 2 In the alert dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag.

A8. and click .F1. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 Click OK 3 times. 15 In the Type Selector.G1. For the 2x12. 12 On the Design Bar. 17 Keynote the component. FasciaProfile_1. click in the Value column. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. For the 2x6. select Corrugated Metal. using keynote 07460. navigate to 07645. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 06110. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.I1. For the 2x8. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06110. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.D11. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. 18 Save the file. You do this in order to keynote the component.6 Click Modify.D1. click Detail Component. use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . click Keynote ➤ Element.F1. use keynote 09250. click Edit/New. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 319. use keynote 06160. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. select the metal fascia with drip edge.20 Ga.

navigate to your preferred location. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Lock the line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 11 Press DELETE. and select the right end point. click Load into Projects. 4 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate.rft. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Edit/New. click Training Files. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times. for File name. 8 In the Save As dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Detail Component. 16 Select the component. and click Modify. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Medium Lines. 5 In the drawing area. select the left end point of the reference line.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 15 Click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Lines. 19 In the Name dialog. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and click Save. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 319 . select Medium Line Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 22 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar.

24 While pressing CTRL. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click . 44 On the Design Bar. 30 Click Modify. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component.G1.A1. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 46 Click Modify. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. select i_Light Line Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 49 With the component selected. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and click Open. 38 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and hidden) used in the view. and click . and click the lower end at the break line. 42 Using the same method used previously. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 25 Next. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. and click OK. and i_Light Line Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Name dialog. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . click in the Value column. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 29 In the drawing area.A5. 31 Select the component. name the component Air Barrier. 48 Using the same method used previously. (Move). click Detail Component. and click . click Detail Component. 47 Select the component. click Duplicate. against the 3/4" plywood. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. and assign it keynote 06110. invisible. 37 Click OK 3 times. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang.

52 In the Type Selector. 55 Click Modify. and click . select Chain. leaving the detail component lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 53 On the Options Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 321 . 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.

draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. name the component Vapor Barrier. click Detail Component. 68 In the drawing area. 67 In the Type Selector.A4. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element.58 Using the method used previously. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 60 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260. 2 x 8 Framing. Air Barrier. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 61 In the drawing area. select Invisible Lines. click Load into Projects. and Vapor Barrier.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 63 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector.

73 Proceed to the next exercise. under Keynote Table. and press TAB. Each keynote displays as a simple number.A4. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Path Type. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter 07463. and close the text editor. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. select all the keynotes.A1. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 323 . 71 In the drawing area. name the component Batt Insul. and click . Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 Click Modify.A1. select Absolute. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). click File menu ➤ Save. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Enter 07460. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and assign it keynote 07210. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. click Keynote ➤ Element. and press ENTER. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 3 In the text editor. navigate to 07463. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the drawing area. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and click OK. and press TAB. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click Open. and click to place the note. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.rvt. The database file opens in a text editor. 70 Using the method used previously. and click OK. 72 Save the file. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.txt. click Browse.69 Select the component. add a keynote for the component. click to place the leader. In the Type Selector.A9.

324 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Center to Center is selected. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. click Training Files. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.rvt. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library.dwg. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. These details do not update with changes to the building model. verify that Auto . Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. After you create a drafting view. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 13 Click Modify. 14 Save the file. For Positioning. you learn how to create a drafted detail. and click OK. For Colors. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. select 3" = 1'-0". You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select Black and White. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. The detail that you import is in DWG format. for Scale.

Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. select Reference other view. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. right-click Drafting 1. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. enter EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. 5 Click Modify. The detail is imported as an import symbol. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Reference Callout | 325 . and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Select the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Creating a Reference Callout on page 325. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 6 In the Project Browser.■ Click Open. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. and click Rename. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.rvt. click Callout.

16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.No Reference.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Sect. and click Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and double-click the callout. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). click Rename. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. enter Detail . for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and click OK. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. delete the existing value. for New./Details. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.No Reference). click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. double-click A105 .Elev. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 10 In the Rename dialog.

and click OK. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 3 On the View Control Bar. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 327 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Header @ Sliding Door. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. for Name.rvt. click Detail Component.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Board. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select Wide Lines. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. 14 Click OK 3 times. 18 While pressing CTRL. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click . and click OK. 19 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum-Plaster. select the width dimension. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. On the Options Bar. 11 In the Name dialog. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Gyp. click Duplicate. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click Filled Region. click Edit/New. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 17 Click Modify. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. and enter 5/8".

Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. 24 Select the mirrored region. click 22 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and click above the top of the region as the end point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. and on the Edit toolbar. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). (Draw).Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Move the cursor up.

and select the right edge of the wood region. click Filled Region.Finish. click (Align). for Name.Finish. click Region Properties. 30 In the Name dialog. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . select Medium Lines. select Wood . 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 33 Click OK 3 times. Draw a rectangle as shown. verify that the thickness is 3/4". 31 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. click (Rectangle). click Duplicate.25 Click Modify. enter Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.

verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". and press ENTER. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Ref Plane. 38 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 42 On the Design Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. enter 1/4". For Offset. 39 In the Type Selector. sketch the new region as shown. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 40 On the Options Bar. click . select Medium Lines.37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

(Align). and click to select the point. and press ENTER. and click to select the point. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click 48 Click Modify. enter 0. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor down 1'. Move the cursor right 1". For Offset. and click to select the point. click Filled Region. Select Chain. enter 3/8". 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). For Offset. Move the cursor left 1". Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing .46 On the Tools toolbar. 47 Click the reference plane.

click Detail Lines. For Offset. click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. enter 1/8". and select the bottom horizontal line. click (Trim/Extend). 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and right edges of the door panel region. top. 60 Select the left. select Medium Lines.54 On the Tools toolbar. 58 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.

62 Select the left detail line. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. select the height dimension. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 65 On the Options Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. click Training Files. click Load. and click Open. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. enter 3". click Detail Component. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing .61 Click Modify. 68 Click Modify. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 69 Select the bolt.rfa. and press ENTER.

select Thin Lines. use the images as a guide. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. click . click Detail Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. click Training Files.rfa. 79 In the Type Selector. 74 Select the expansion bolt. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Load. select Wide Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. and click Open. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side.70 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 78 On the Design Bar. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.

84 On the Design Bar. click .82 Select the rectangle. click Detail Lines. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 87 Click Modify. (Mirror). 85 On the Options Bar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar.

select Medium Lines.89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). 92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

click Detail Lines. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. and click to place the arc as shown. and press ENTER. 101 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. select the length dimension. click Detail Component. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click . enter 1/8". select Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. 99 Click Modify. 97 On the Options Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. 95 On the Design Bar.

You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. the new style displays only inches. For Rounding. Select Suppress 0 Feet. and click Modify. and on the Options Bar.3/32" Arial. click Dimension. 107 Select the dimension line. The dimension display is updated. click Dimension. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click OK. 106 Click to place the dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 114 On the Design Bar. select To the nearest 1/16". . 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Detail Linear .Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. for Text ➤ Units Format. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 339 . 113 Click OK 3 times. 110 In the Name dialog. 105 In the drawing area.

117 Select the dimension line. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. and then click the dimension text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. 120 Under Text Fields.3/32”Arial. and enter Varies. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 121 Click OK. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension. and click Modify. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. for Below. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter See Schedule. under Dimension Value.115 In the Type Selector. using the Drag Text grip. select Replace With Text.

select Replace With Text. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 130 Click OK. and click the dimension text.125 Select Modify to end the command. 128 Click OK. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 341 . under Dimension Value. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C.

and on the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. click Text. 132 In the Options Bar. 138 On the Design Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 134 Enter Gyp. and click Modify. click Modify to end the command. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. select the gypsum board region on the left. 139 Save the file. 342 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Board. click (Add Right Arc Leader).Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 135 Select the note. and click to place the text. click to create an arced leader.

and double-click East. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. click Training Files. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 343 .rvt.

4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Hexagon. for Number of Leaders. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar. type 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.rfa. click Symbol. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Training Files.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Modify. 8 Select the keynote. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

on the Options Bar. 13 Select the tag. click (Copy).9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place the copy. Creating a Note Block | 345 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties). type Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text. under Identity Data. and click OK.

Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. (Mirror). clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.14 With the copy selected. 17 Click OK. on the Edit toolbar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. click Copy. 16 For Tag. click (Element Properties). type B. and click. on the Options Bar. 19 With the tag selected. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and on the Options Bar. 18 Using the same method. 15 For Text. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Repair existing door surround.

22 Optionally. click Modify. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Tuckpoint as required. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair as required. using the table as a reference.21 On the Design Bar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 347 . Clean and repair existing stone trim as required.

format. Create. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. type Exterior Construction Notes. 29 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. verify that Arial is selected. for Header text. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. and select Bold. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Sort by. and click OK. On the Appearance tab. select Tag. 28 In the Project Browser. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type 1/4''. Select Text. and double-click A103 . The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 26 Click OK. under Available fields. select Exterior Construction Notes. select Center. for Heading. for Note block name. for the value. 27 In the column header (text). and for Alignment.Elevations. type Mark.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click Add. type Description. expand Sheets (all). Clean cut and repair wall as required. On the Formatting tab. select Tag.

double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.Title Sheet.31 On the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 349 . 1 In the Project Browser. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). click Modify.

change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and click Add. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. double-click T . and in the third field. On the Filter tab. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Index. Select Sheet Name. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. type T. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select does not equal.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. in the second field. select Sheet Number. for Filter by. under Sheets (all). expand Schedules/Quantities.Title Sheet. for Sort by. The drawing list displays. 7 In the Project Browser. ■ 4 Click OK. under Available fields. in the first field.

Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.9 On the Design Bar. and so on). Finally. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Training File Using Legends | 351 . Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 11 Save the file. doors. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and door frames. For the text. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. On construction documents. On construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. door frame schedule. click Modify. windows. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model.

2 In the New Legend View dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Symbol. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. for Name. type Typical Symbol Legend. and click OK. type Legend Text.Open Level Head . 6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . and click OK. and click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 For Text Size. click Edit/New. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Text. select Arial. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. click . for Name. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. type 1/8''. 9 For Text Font.

14 Working from the top down. Creating a Symbol Legend | 353 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 16 In the Project Browser. and for Leader. expand Legends. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected. and click to place it. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Typical Symbol Legend.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and double-click A101 . expand Sheets (all). drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet.

and click to place it. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. under Sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.17 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . 19 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. click Modify. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the file. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.Unit 18.

5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Section. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 4th Floor Wall Types. For Host length. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. type 3'. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. for Family. and press ENTER. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the second wall.rvt. For View. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. and click OK. click Modify. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . and on the Options Bar. click Legend Component. 3 For Scale.

for Leader. click Text. 11 In the Type Selector. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.

and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Creating a Component Legend | 357 .Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 18 Type the following text. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

24 In the Project Browser. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. select Level 4. drag it onto the sheet. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 22 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under Legends. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select 4th Floor Wall Types. right-click Sheets (all).

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. double-click Level 4. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Creating a Component Legend | 359 . Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar.25 On the Design Bar. select the Wall Type 2 component. click (Match Type). 28 In the Project Browser. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. under Floor Plans. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click Modify to end the command.

zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 34 On the View Control Bar.32 In the floor plan view. select Detail Level: Medium. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 33 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.

Using Revision Tracking | 361 . Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. These changes can be due to owner requests. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click 36 Save the file. or changes in building material availability. Using the table. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. double-click Level 4.rvt. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. contractor inquiries.35 Optionally. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.

When you use this option. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. type a date. for Numbering.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 7 Under Show. For example. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. If Visible is not selected. 5 For Description. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. yet as concise as possible. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. If you select Per Sheet. In most instances. if the active revision is number 1. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected. verify that Per Project is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls.

which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Revision clouds have read-only properties.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Save the file. 3 Select the divider. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 5 Select the divider. click Modify. double-click Level 4. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.8 Click OK. you make changes to the project floor plan. Sketching Revision Clouds | 363 . Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click (Move). move the cursor up. including revision number and revision date. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.

click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch. select Snaps Off. click Revision Cloud. click near the partition you moved. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. you load a revision tag into the project. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. select 6. 17 Save the file. click the Annotation Objects tab. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 365 . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 16 Click OK. for Line Weight.

click Training Files. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. under Floor Plans. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click to place the tag. Training File 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. click OK. select Leader. you need to add one. click Tags. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. the cloud is tagged as number 1. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rfa. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 10 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 6 Click Load. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. double-click Level 4. 8 In the Tags dialog. You then issue a revision. click Tag ➤ By Category. 12 Save the file. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project.rvt.

and click OK. 9 Click OK. Working with Revisions | 367 . Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. double-click A107 . Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You do this by issuing the revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 For Description. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. under Sheets. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. NOTE After you issue a revision. click Add. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 8 Add another revision row. and enter a date. You can continue to add revisions.rvt. you prevent further changes to the revision. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Unnamed. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and enter a date for the revision. with the description Relocate Door. select Issued. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. type Modify Paving Area. you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.

2 . 12 In the drawing area. select Seq. under Floor Plans. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. select Tag ➤ By Category. double-click Level 4. 11 On the Drafting tab. apply Seq. 3 . 17 Using the same method learned previously.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 13 Click Finish Sketch. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. click to add a revision clouds. 10 In the Project Browser.Modify Paving Area. 15 On the Options Bar. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. double-click A107 . under Sheets (all). 19 To add tags. for Revision. 20 On the Project Browser. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Unnamed. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select Revision Cloud. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the revision cloud. in the drawing area.

23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. select Alphabetic. for Numbering. 26 In the drawing area. 25 Click OK twice. You do this so that the revision can be changed. Working with Revisions | 369 . The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. delete the first 3 characters. height. for Sequence. select the titleblock. In order to make formatting changes (appearance.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you edit the titleblock family. clear Issued. and rotation) to the revision schedule. beginning with "D". You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. Click Options. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. For each revision.

Select Grid lines. 33 Select the schedule header. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Design Bar. Select Outline. for Build Schedule. click Yes. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. for Appearance. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Yes. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Clear Blank row before data. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Edit. right-click Revision Schedule. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and select Wide Lines for the outline type.27 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Other. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Modify. click Load into Projects. select Bottom-up. 28 In the alert dialog. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Edit Family. and drag it above the schedule area. and click Properties.

click Edit. 46 Click OK twice. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. select User defined. right-click Revision Schedule.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. select 90° Counterclockwise. enter Rev. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Height. With a user-defined height. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. When the height property is variable. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. and click Properties. select the revision schedule. for Rotation on Sheet. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 40 Select the revision schedule header. for Formatting. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. under Other.. Working with Revisions | 371 . Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. open the titleblock family for editing. 45 On the Appearance tab. for Heading. and on the Options Bar.

text. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Load into Projects. 51 Save the file. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. 372 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Training Files. click Text. click Modify.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Title Sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. and place it on a sheet. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click to add text without a leader. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.JPG. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Importing Image Files | 373 .Importing Image Files In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. double-click T . for Leader.

Training File 374 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 11 Save the file. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. with the new text box still selected. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 6 Select the text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.doc text file in another window. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Modify. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.

9 Click to place the image on the sheet. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Desktop. 12 Save the file. 10 On the Design Bar. select the document writer. for Name.JPG. double-click A102 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.xls. type Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. Importing Spreadsheets | 375 . click Training Files.mdi. click Modify. This step has been completed for you. and click Save. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 5 Click OK. for File name. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This exercise demonstrates a common method. and saved as Fixture Schedule. under Sheets.Unit 18.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 3 In Microsoft Excel. click File menu ➤ Print. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. This process may vary from system to system.

376 .

To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. 377 . The large floor plan. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 379 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

enter Level 2 . and click Rename. The dependent view opens.Aviary. and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. select the crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. for Name. double-click Level 2. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.

9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

10 Click in the drawing area. 14 Click in the drawing area. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. 15 Select the crop region. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Level 2. and click OK. enter Level 2 .Labs. for Name.

Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. double-click Level 2. click Matchline. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. and on the Zoom flyout.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 20 Click in the drawing area. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit.

■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16'. 24 On the Design Bar.

expand Sheets. 28 For Line Pattern. and click Rename. enter Level 2 Aviary. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click OK. and click OK.Unnamed. click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Project Browser. select 9. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. under Floor Plans.Aviary. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click A101 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 385 . and drag it onto the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. select Double Dash 5/8''. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. for Line Weight. click Level 2 .

36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 39 On the Options Bar. click View Reference. under Floor Plans. for Target view. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. and place the Level 2 . click Modify.Aviary is selected.35 On the Design Bar. 386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .

select Floor Plan: Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. for Target view.Labs. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 387 . click Zoom To Fit. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. click Modify.

click the far right control. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . double-click Level 2 . and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 48 Select the crop region. 47 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. after modifying the annotation crop region.Aviary. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click (Show Crop Region). select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.46 In the Project Browser. 49 If.

54 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. 51 On the View Control Bar. and click Apply Dependent Views. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. select all views in the list. 55 On the Zoom flyout. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). but are not placed on sheets. and click OK. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 53 In the Select Views dialog. expand Level 1.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 389 .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click South Elevation. 390 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.The dependent view opens. cropping the view to the lab building. right-click South Elevation.Right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. enter South Elevation . click (Hide Crop Region). and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 391 . enter South Elevation . select the Crop Region.Left. expand South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. for Name. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. cropping the view to the aviary. and click OK. 5 In the drawing area. 7 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the view. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. and click Rename. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 18 In the Project Browser.Left. 20 In the Project Browser. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click A103 Unnamed. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.13 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets. and drag it onto the sheet. click South Elevation . click (Hide Crop Region). 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. click South Elevation . enter South Elevation. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 16 In the Project Browser.Right. under Elevations. and drag it onto the sheet. 392 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Name. under Elevations.

Left is selected. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 393 . for Target view. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.22 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar.Right. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. for Target view. 25 On the Options Bar. select Elevation: South Elevation . under Elevations. click Modify. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. double-click South Elevation. click View Reference. 23 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all).South Elevation. Select the crop region. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. Right-click the view. double-click A103 . and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. and click Activate View.30 On the Design Bar. NOTE If the view references are not visible. click Modify. 394 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Viewing and Rendering 395 .

396 .

You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. Daytime rendering of the pool house 397 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.

When you complete these changes. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. 398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. and then render a final exterior view. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. and create the perspective view that you want to render. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you specify options that define the model environment. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. After you create the perspective view. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. In this exercise. add trees to the building site. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. the pad. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 399

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 401

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 403

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 405.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 405

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 407

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View on page 409.

Creating a Perspective View
In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Creating a Perspective View | 409

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:

Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

The perspective view displays.

410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 Zoom out, and select the crop boundary. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground, as shown. Depending on camera placement, the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site, and adjust the field of vision, as necessary. If the camera is not shown in the view, in the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click Show Camera. With the camera shown, the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.

Creating a Perspective View | 411

6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

10 Save the file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 413.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating the Exterior Rendering
In this exercise, you specify the time and location settings for the rendering, and render a daytime view of the exterior.

You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 413

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering Dialog).

You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings, see Re-orienting the Project on page 453. 3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

9 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model. After the image is rendered, you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.

10 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog, click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog:
■ ■ ■

In the left pane, click Desktop. For Files of type, select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Click Save.

The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 415

Night. under 3D Views. 16 With the Exterior . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Name. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Day view to Exterior .120V to the Pool Lights group. under Lighting. enter Pool Lights. you duplicate the view and change the settings. for Name. click New. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . click New. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. and click Move to Group.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. click Render. enter Pool House Lights.Flat Round : 60W . 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . verify that Pool Lights is selected. select the first light. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night view open. dialog. and click OK.Exterior .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . click OK. 22 Using the same method.Day. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog. and click OK. right-click Exterior .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Flat Round : 60W .Night. and select the last light. under Group Options. for Scheme.Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options. and click OK. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. press and hold SHIFT. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . To select a sequential list. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. click Dialog). 25 Using the same method. select Exterior: Artificial only. add 30 :Sconce Light . and click Artificial Lights.

under Image. 30 In the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. In this example. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. enter 4.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. After the image is rendered. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. Rendering an Interior View | 417 . Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. for Exposure Value. click Adjust Exposure. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View on page 417. 32 Save the file. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Show the model.

Adding RPC People In this exercise. and finally. render the views. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. define the perspective view and rendering settings.

and on the Edit toolbar. 5 On the Design Bar. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 4 In the Type Selector. ■ (Rotate). under Floor Plans.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. and place the component inside the pool house. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click Modify. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. Adding RPC People | 419 . the person’s line of sight. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important. select RPC Female : YinYin. 6 Select the figure. double-click Level 1.

you can enable this option.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. click (Element Properties). 12 Click OK 3 times. under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. select Cast Reflections. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 Save the file. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. By default. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. under Parameters. click Edit. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit/New. 13 On the Design Bar.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 421 . click Camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 421. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.rvt.

under 3D Views. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.The perspective view displays. and click Properties. select Section Box. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under Extents. and click OK. 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D View 1.

under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click Level 1. In order to accurately adjust the section box. in addition to the 3D view. 11 In the 3D view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click South. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 423 . select the section box. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

14 In the 3D view. 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. select the section box. right-click.

Creating the Interior Rendering on page 425. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. To create a daytime view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.15 Maximize the 3D view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and render the interior view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 425 . 17 Save the file. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. and curtain walls. doors that contain windows or glass. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

for Scheme. clear Pool Lights. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click Rename. enter Interior . 7 Under Quality. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. You can specify a lower quality. click (Show Rendering Dialog).rvt.Night. and click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. select Interior: Artificial only. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 5 Click Artificial Lights. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Rendering dialog. select Draft. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 2 In the Rename View dialog. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. After these settings are established. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 4 In the Rendering dialog. you turn them off for this scene. under 3D Views. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Lighting. click Render. for Setting.

11 Rename the copied view to Interior . and click OK. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. For more information on daylight portals. for Daylight Portal Options. but the space will receive standard daylighting. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. (Show Rendering Dialog). Creating the Interior Rendering | 427 . and click Render. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. For sunlit interiors. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. You create a view for the interior during the day. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.Day. select Curtain Walls.Santa Monica. for Scheme. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. you must create a custom setting.9 Close the Rendering dialog. the daylight portals can be turned on. select Spring Equinox . IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. 17 In the Rendering dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. 13 In the Rendering dialog. select Edit.Night. The preset schemes are read-only. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. By default they are turned off. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 3pm. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. select Interior: Sun only. select Region. In this case. right-click Interior . click Copy To Custom. for Sun. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. click 14 For Setting.

and close the Rendering dialog. enter 1.18 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. click Adjust Exposure. and on the Options Bar. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Show the model. 20 In the Rendering dialog. enter 10. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. (Element 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Click OK. select the column on the right. click Properties). For Saturation. In the next steps. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area.

you can define the output and quality settings for final output. Creating the Interior Rendering | 429 . enter 90. select the crop boundary. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled.6. 26 Click Update Preview. and click OK. For Amount. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). 23 With the column still selected. For Bump. add a bump map to create texture. for Resolution. 30 In the drawing area. enter 5''. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Setting. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. clear Region. under Output Settings. select High. select Unfinished. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. As size and DPI are increased.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. click OK. and click Render. select Printer. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Click OK. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Wood. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. You change the varnish setting. select Based on wood grain. For Width. For Rotate. the render time increases significantly. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size.

The rendered image displays. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Usually. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. In a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. or section view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. elevation. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. but you can also define it in a 3D.

right-click in the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. click Training Files. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected. and ends in the far corner of the living room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. proceeds through the dining room. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and open Common\c_Townhouse. expand Views (all). and click the tab in the context menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 431 . and change unit formats as desired. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 432 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

for Width. on the Options Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 433 . and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 16''. and select the crop boundary. 16 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View menu. 11 Under Change. 17 Click . 14 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 9''. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. verify that Field of view is selected. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. for Frame. enter 1. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click the dimensions for Size. and for Height. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. If it is not. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 13 On the Options Bar.

press ESC. proceed to the next exercise. double-click 1st Floor. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.The walkthrough plays. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. 434 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Floor Plans. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. under Extents. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. c_Townhouse. click (Element Properties). and click OK. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 434. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. and drag it to the location shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 435 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 7 Click the third key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 6 On the Options Bar. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. for Controls. select Path.

under Output Length. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. c_Townhouse. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. for Compressor. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. for Frames/sec. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click Save.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 If you want to save this exercise. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. When you export the walkthrough. shading with edges. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. reducing the size of the image. click Edit Walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough on page 436. 3 Under Format. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. If you are unsure of what option to use. for Model Graphics Style. or rendering. select <Shading>. and click OK. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 9 To play the walkthrough. specifying the number of frames. 436 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 In the Length/Format dialog. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. hidden line. and click OK. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. shading. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. The walkthrough is recorded. double-click Walkthrough 1. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. . Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. on the Options Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. enter 15. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. under Walkthroughs.

Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. 437 . A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. More specifically. In this tutorial.

you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click Camera. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A 3D view is created. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.Courtyard View In this exercise. click shown.rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Floor Plans.Creating a Solar Study . and double-click 01 Entry. (SteeringWheels). as 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

9 On the File menu. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 439. double-click 01 Entry.5 On the Design Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and click OK. click Section. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.Courtyard View. enter Solar Study . and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 439 . under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Rename. as shown. click Modify. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. if necessary. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 In the Project Browser. you create a section cutaway view.

13 On the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. expand Sections. as shown. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 6 To view the section. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head.

NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. Typical plan views. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. you create a plan cutaway view. double-click 01 Entry. under 3D Views. then select Medium. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 18 On the File menu. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. including the house. 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 To hide the section box. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. then Fine. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 441. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. click Callout. right-click {3D}.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. do not display many elements in 3D. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click . right-click Callout of 01 Entry. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click Rename. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. click Save. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. clear Section Boxes. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 441 . Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. as shown. In some cases.

8 On the View toolbar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click (SteeringWheels). as shown. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 9 On the SteeringWheel. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the Roof. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.

20 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 18 In the Project Browser. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.17 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. click Save. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. under 3D Views. 21 On the File menu. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 443 . and click Rename.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Detail Level ➤ Fine. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views.

For this study. for City. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. . date range. MA. you specify the location. click . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . For the Single-Day solar study. 9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click Duplicate. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. leave the slider at 50. Los Angeles. and time range. expand 3D Views. and time. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. USA is selected.Creating Solar Studies . For the Multi-Day solar study. enter Summer Solstice. Click the Single-Day tab. select Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. date.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. single-day. click click OK. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. You can create a still. USA. click . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select Cast Shadows. expand Views (all). 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you used in the previous lesson.Boston. or multi-day solar study. 10 Under Place. you specify the location. CA. 4 For Sun Position. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

Los Angeles. ■ For Time Interval. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Under Frame. select June 22. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. confirm that Summer Solstice. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. enter Winter Solstice. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Winter Solstice. 16 In the Name dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Clear Ground Plane at Level. For Time Range. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. under Frame. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise.Courtyard View is currently displayed. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 445 . click . 14 In this case. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles is selected. 2008. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. for Date. and click Duplicate. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 19 On the File menu. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 445. 2008. select December 22. 8 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. click Save. for Sun Position. enter 10 and press ENTER. Los Angeles. click OK.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date.

AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click To play the animation from start to finish. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. for Sun Position. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Text. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click . . Los Angeles. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. . 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. select Summer Solstice. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. approximately as shown. on the Single-Day tab.■ To display the next key frame. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. The solar study animation plays. under Floor Plans. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click OK. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click . 14 On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click To display the next sequential frame. click . double-click 01 Entry. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

click Lines. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting the Study as AVI | 447 . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click . On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. approximately as shown. as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 8 For Sun Position.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click and enter Dining. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 5 In the Project Browser. click . as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. expand 3D Views. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.

select Section Boxes. and click OK. and click OK. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. On the Annotation Categories tab. and enter 5 to 50. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. click OK. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 11 To display the section box. select the section box. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. under Output Length. 14 Click outside of the section box. as shown. 12 In the drawing area. clear Section Boxes. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. on the Single-Day tab. 15 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Summer Solstice. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles. select Frame Range. ■ For Frames per second.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. if necessary. verify that the value is set to 15.

enter 450 in the first field (width). For Files of Type. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For Frames per second.■ ■ Under Format. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Los Angeles. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. select AVI Files. click OK. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics.Los Angeles. 3 For Sun Position. for Compressor. and click OK. you open each image. verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 449. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and enter 5 to 10. Click OK. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. for Model Graphics Style. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. verify that the value is set to 15. select Frame Range. of the animation separately. For Dimensions. click . click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. on the Single-Day tab. or frame. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Under Format. To view the animation. Exporting a Study as PNG | 449 . 2 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. For File Name. under Output Length. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. select Winter Solstice. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file.

The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. or GIF. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. select PNG. or any single-frame format. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the Desktop icon. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. as shown: 9 On the File menu. BMP. In this example. For Files of Type. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. such as JPEG. For File name. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG.■ For Dimensions. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. depending on the Frame Range.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. under 3D Views.Los Angeles. 8 Click Save. Click OK. enter 450 in the first field (width). double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. TIFF.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 451 .

click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day.Los Angeles .Boston. clear Section Boxes. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. For Time Interval. and click OK. 5 Select the roof. click the Multi-Day tab. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . and click Duplicate. MA. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. for Sun Position. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. USA. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. select One week. 8 On the View Control Bar. specify 2:00 pm. for File name enter 2pm . 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Time. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and on the View Control Bar.Week Interval. click OK. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and click OK.

double-click 01 Entry. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. In the Length/Format dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. for File Name.South. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. When you mirror a project. for Compressor. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. such as East .15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Re-orienting the Project | 453 . click OK. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. you mirror all model elements. model views. under Floor Plans. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and annotations in non-drafting views.West or North . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. Click the Desktop icon. and click Save.

Then. 2 In the drawing area. For additional information.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. The project is mirrored along the East . see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 6 On the Standard toolbar.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West. select the roof. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. and click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. under 3D Views. In this exercise. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. select East . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 5 In the warning dialog. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.West axis.

For example. and select Winter Solstice. 12 Under Date and Time. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 For Sun Position. change the time back to 12:00 PM. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view.3 On the View Control Bar. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Apply. click . and click OK. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click . 10 Under Date and Time. select Summer Solstice. Orienting to True North | 455 . specify 11:00 AM for time. 8 For Sun Position. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. click the Still tab. on the Still tab. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.

and click OK. the view settings must be set for True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. under Floor Plans. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click the Still tab. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. 456 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 15 For Sun Position. select True North. right click 01 Entry. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. and select Winter Solstice. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 19 In the Project Browser. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Properties. 14 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click OK. When a project is started. click . and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. double-click 01 Entry. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. click OK.

■ To establish the new direction of True North. click toward the top of the screen. Orienting to True North | 457 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. as shown.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 01 Entry. 32 On the View Control Bar. click the Still tab. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. select True North Orientation. and click Apply. 458 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. for Orientation. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. right-click 01 Entry. 27 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click . Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. and click OK. select Project North. enter True North Orientation. 33 For Sun Position. and click Element Properties. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. right-click. select True North. for Orientation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views.23 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 28 In the Project Browser. select Summer Solstice.

for Dimensions. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the Length/Format dialog. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. Click OK.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Format. Los Angeles. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click Summer Solstice. enter 600 in the first field. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click OK. click the Desktop icon. For Files of Type. Orienting to True North | 459 . click the Single-Day tab. For File Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Click Save. for Compressor. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

and click Duplicate. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Interior: Sun only. under Quality. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. for Scheme. and exporting it as a JPEG image. For Sun. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. Since a rendered image is temporary. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. 2 In the Project Browser. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. for Setting. Under Lighting. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Edit/New. Rendered views do not have this limitation. In the Name dialog. under Settings. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397 for additional information on rendering. select 12/22. select Medium. for Date and Time. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and 2:00 PM. In this exercise. 460 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. capturing it. select Winter Solstice.

For Files of type. verify that JPEG Files is selected. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 461 . and click Save. click Desktop. click Export. click Save to Project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.6 In the Rendering dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.

462 .

type. They include rendering. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. length. Other tools in the software. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. however. elevations. and section boxes. or the client. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. and details. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. an outside reviewer.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. 463 . For the realistic approach. advanced model graphics. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. you explore the stylistic approach. sections. In this tutorial. When organizing presentation graphics. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Whether the audience is the general contractor. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. a consultant. linework. Using the pre-built building model. In this series of exercises. Co-house.

To fit the floor plan into the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan.

you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. under Floor Plans.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. Cnst. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 465 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and click Rename. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. right-click 2nd Flr. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. Cnst. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser.

click the Scale control and select 1/8" = 1’ 0". elevations. Down Arrow. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and clear DOWN Text. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and other annotations in this view. No annotations display in the view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. navigate to the folder of your choice. dimensions. click the Annotation Categories tab. click in the drawing area. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 466.TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 8 Click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. this represents the view getting smaller. name the project i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Save. UP Text. exit the menu. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . expand the Stairs category. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 7 Under Visibility. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. sections. 11 In the Save As directory. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and Up Arrow.

7 For Place. Within a project. select Boston.rvt. 6 Under Settings. click (Shadows Off). Using Advanced Model Graphics | 467 . on the Still tab. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ■ For Contrast. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. The higher the number. and click OK. click . NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. select By Date. Time and Place. 3 On the View Control Bar. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. click the Place tab. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. modify. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 9 For City. MA. specify 35. the darker the shadows. At that place. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. you can create.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click . For Sun Position. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

. click OK. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. and click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK.NOTE For this step. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. click (Shadows On). This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 1:00 PM. however. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 12 Click OK. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify 10/27. for Date and Time. Cnst. If you select a different city. clear Ground Plane at Level. and select 1st Flr. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you can select any city. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. under Settings.

click Add View. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. select Arch D 36 x 24 Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. and click View. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. right-click the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 469.19 Proceed with the next exercise. and click to place it. The viewport displays at the cursor. TIP If the View tab is not available. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 469 .

click OK.6 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and notice the view title. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click Modify. for Show Title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click Edit/New. For this analytique. click . 9 On the Options Bar. The viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. enter Presentation. and click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. 12 In the Name dialog.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 471 . and the boundary of the region. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. If necessary. select Invisible lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 17 In the Type Selector. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 18 On the Options Bar. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click . you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click . The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. fill properties. and select Chain. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. When you finish drawing the chain. 20 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines.

472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. enter Solid Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit/New. 25 In the Name dialog. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Name. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 472. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click Duplicate. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click OK. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Solid fill. click . and click Deactivate View. and click View Properties. click Region Properties. scroll down. click Finish Sketch.22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Presentation. for Sheet Name.

you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click South. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 473 . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Visibility. enter Presentation South Elevation. click in the Walls row. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Settings. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Time and Place. click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click in the drawing area. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click OK. click Duplicate. under Elevations. clear Visible. 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Override. 13 For Contrast. 16 In the Name dialog. specify 35. 14 For Sun Position. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click . and click OK. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. exit the menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. 18 For Time. under Visibility. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.2 In the Project Browser. scroll up. under Pattern Overrides. and clear Elevation Swing. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 2:30 PM. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 On the View Control Bar. right-click Copy of South. By changing the angle of the sun. expand the Doors category. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select By Date. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. click (Shadows Off). 9 Click OK. on the Model Categories tab. 12 Under Shadow.

TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. double-click A106 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Add View to Sheet. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 475. click Add View.rvt.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 475 . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

The viewport displays a view title. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 477. click Modify. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 477 . 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.

0". Adjust the controls to modify the extents. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. and use the flip arrows if necessary. click Section. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 1/8" = 1'.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. under Floor Plans.rvt. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 4 Add the section shown below. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. for Scale. Cnst. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

for Scale. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view.Section 2 is added to the building model. click Callout. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). this view needs to be rotated 180°. as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0". To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 479 . 7 On the Options Bar. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. To fit correctly in the analytique. select 1/8" = 1'.

12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. enter Presentation Section 2. 11 In the Rename View dialog. expand the Doors category. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Override. double-click Presentation Section 2. scroll up. and clear Elevation Swing. 17 Under Visibility. 15 Under Visibility. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Pattern Overrides. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. click the Model Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. right-click Callout of Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click in the Walls row. clear Visible.

20 Click OK. (Hide Crop Region). 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 481 . This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click The crop regions no longer display. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 482. When you select the crop region.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 22 On the View Control Bar.

under Sections (Callout 1). specify 35. click Duplicate. For Contrast. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click . 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. In the steps that follow. ■ For Sun Position. The shadows do not offer much contrast. in the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 6 In the Name dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Click Apply. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. In addition. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify 135°. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 484. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Select Relative to View. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click OK. NOTE The line style. click (Shadows On). For Azimuth. was added to this training file for training purposes. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. select Silhouette Edges. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. and click OK. select Directly. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 70°. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. For Altitude. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 483 . for Silhouette style. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Silhouette Edges.

double-click A106 .Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.rvt. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click to place the selected view.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Add View.

The view title no longer displays. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Section 2. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. In the steps that follow. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. To rotate an object. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. under Sections (Callout 1). click (Rotate). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 485 . Using a clock as a reference. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. and press Enter. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation.5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.

Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. double-click A106 .Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.The callout rotates 180°. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.

After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 487 . Working with a Presentation View Template on page 487. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation. right-click Section 1. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Rename. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1).Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Type 1). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 7 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Section 1.rvt. 3 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click OK.

Working with a Presentation View Template | 489 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. for Rotation on Sheet. double-click A106 . and click OK. annotations. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and elevation swings no longer display. and click OK. 15 Right-click the viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. lighting fixtures. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. select 90° Counterclockwise. click Add View. and click Activate View.9 In the Apply View Template dialog.Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The furniture. and click Add View to Sheet. under Names. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing.

In this exercise. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. traditional analytiques contain a detail. such as a tracery window or a column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 490.

under Sections (Type 1). as shown. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Working in a Callout Analytique | 491 . under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Callout. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. right-click Callout of Section 1. After you add the callout. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. select the callout.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

and click OK. under Extents. and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. and click View Properties. as shown. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. double-click Presentation Callout. 8 Right-click. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. enter Presentation Callout. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .5 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. 7 Select the crop region. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1).

Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. specify 22. select Viewport : Presentation. select Custom. Click OK.Presentation. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Working in a Callout Analytique | 493 . Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Section: Presentation Callout. 14 In the Type Selector. click Add View. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. double-click A106 . and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet. For Scale Value 1.

under Sections (Callout 1).19 Right-click the callout presentation view. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown below. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Edit/New. In the steps that follow. click Region Properties. When finished. activate the viewport. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Filled Region. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and make adjustments as necessary.

26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. When you are finished. and click Activate View. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.Presentation. click . 28 In the Project Browser. on the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 495 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). select Solid fill. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.25 In the Type Properties dialog. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. double-click A106 . and click OK 3 times.

32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Show Crop Region). and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the crop region. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 497. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 497 . 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. click (Hide Crop Region). You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click the Scale control. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 On the View Control Bar. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows Off). 5 On the View Control Bar. and click 1" = 20'-0". double-click Isometric. and apply shadows to the views. under 3D Views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

12 In the Rename View dialog. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. right-click Isometric. A section box displays around the building model. for Silhouette style. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 499 . enter Isometric 2. select Section Box. 8 In the Name dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 15 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Sun Position. enter Isometric 1. double-click Isometric 2. under Extents. Click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. specify 135°. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 14 In the Project Browser. select Silhouette Edges. Select Relative to View. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Rename. and click OK. specify 35. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. click Duplicate. and click OK. For Altitude. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 13 In the Project Browser. click . under 3D Views. Cnst. select Directly. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 1. in the list. Select 1st Flr. For Azimuth. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. specify 45°. select Cast Shadows.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. Grips display on each face of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown. You can use this to rotate the section box.19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar.

29 To hide the section box. The section box no longer displays. double-click Isometric 2. 25 To hide the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. If desired. double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. the stairs and railings may display. and click OK. make a copy of the view. 27 Select the section box. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 501 . right-click Copy of Isometric 2. clear Section Boxes.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. 23 In the Rename View dialog. you can adjust the plane location. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. enter Isometric 3. 24 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 21 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser.

In the Type Selector. 31 In the Project Browser. The filled region partially covers the view. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click A106 .Next. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. under Sheets (all). In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. 32 In the Project Browser. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views.

39 For Background. 35 Select the poche filled region. select Concrete. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. click Edit. select Transparent. On the Options Bar. The image below shows the redrawn lines. for Fill Patterns. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Using the drawing tools.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 41 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. and click Activate View. 40 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 503 . click Lines. 36 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.

for Fill Pattern. click Region Properties. click Edit/New.43 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Solid fill. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 505. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Click OK twice.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Cnst. then you specify the eye direction and range. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. you add it to the presentation sheet. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The view opens immediately.rvt. under Floor Plans. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 505 . Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. a cutaway perspective view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you create the final view for the analytique. click Camera.

select Cast Shadows. specify 35. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For Contrast. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Silhouette style. For Sun Position. for Name. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 506 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. specify the following: Under Shadow. 6 On the View Control Bar. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . and click Advanced Model Graphics.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. Grips display on each plane of the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Section Box. 12 Select the section box. under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 507 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions). 17 Under Model Crop Size. clear Section Boxes. for Width. 19 To hide the section box. In the Type Selector. 18 On the View Control Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. enter 6 1/2". under Change. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Sheets (all). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 508 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Because scale does not apply to perspective views.Presentation. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. click (Hide Crop Region). 15 On the Options Bar. click Size. you must specify the actual size of the image.14 Select the crop region. and click OK. double-click A106 .

10 In the Name dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. enter Description. select Text : Title. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A106 . i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. under Text.rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter Title. under Text. Annotating the Analytique on page 509. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. specify a text size of 1 1/2". select the same font as the title. click . 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 6 In the Name dialog. click OK. select a font. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Text. click Duplicate. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique | 509 . specify a text size of 1/4".

16 In the Type Selector. 510 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 18 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

Importing and Exporting 511 .

512 .

In this tutorial. that compose the building. Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. and roofs. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. After you import the SketchUp model. you can easily add detail with Revit components. 513 .Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. curtain walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.

5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. Click the Sketchup file. select Auto-Detect. Double-click the Common folder. for File name.rte. 10 In the Name dialog. buildings. and open Imperial\Templates\default. click OK. 9 In the informational dialog. click Training Files. For Import units. 6 In the Save As dialog. click Create Mass. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and not in the library. 4 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Files of type. For Layers. and click Save. select All. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. or select from a list. enter Import SketchUp. you create a Revit Architecture project. click OK. click Browse. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. For Colors. visible elements. click the Massing tab.skp. and click OK. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. select SketchUp Files. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. select Preserve. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. ■ 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. enter SketchUp Model. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. under Template file.

curtain walls. For Place at level. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 515 . Level 1 is the only choice. select Level 1. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click the Close button.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. ■ ■ For Positioning.Center. click . 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 14 On the View toolbar. depending on the complexity of the project. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. select Manual . 16 On the Design Bar. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. such as walls. click Finish Mass. 17 In the warning dialog. and roofs. Click Open. In a new project.

18 Proceed to the next exercise.12'' displays. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. verify Basic Roof: Generic . for Level. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. that compose the building. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 516. After you create the building from the mass faces. and on the View Control Bar. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. such as walls. select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 3 In the Type Selector. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. verify Level 2 is selected. curtain walls. and roofs.

on the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. To see the new roof. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. 9 On the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. A roof is created from the mass face. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 6 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click to display masses.

14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Create Roof. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. 12 On the Design Bar.

19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.15 On the Design Bar.8'' displays. 22 In the Type Selector. click roofs that you created. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . verify Basic Wall: Generic . 21 On the Design Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. select Core Face: Exterior. for Loc Line. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Modify to end the command. click Wall by Face. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 16 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar.

Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 5' x 10' displays. click Curtain System by Face.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs. 28 In the Type Selector.

Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System.30 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 32 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 31 Using the same technique. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Create Roof.35 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. click Roof by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. click Wall by Face. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 38 Select the mass face shown below. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. 522 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and select it. and on the Options Bar. click Create System. and on the Options Bar. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 523 . Below the right corner of the view. specify a point to place the camera. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Camera.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. and select the mass face shown below. click Wall by Face. 42 On the View toolbar.

specify a point for the camera target. Click the frame to display its grips. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. click your building in the view. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. 524 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . as shown. 48 On the View toolbar. roofs.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls.

50 On the Options Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Click OK.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. click . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 525 . click Modify. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. select Center. and select the left curtain system in the view.

under 3D Views. click Door. double-click {3D}. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 59 On the View toolbar. 55 Right-click. 63 In the Type Selector. and move the roof edges as shown below. and click Cancel to end the command. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 3D View 1. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. verify Single-Flush: 36'' x 84'' displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 526 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. 56 In the Project Browser.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 527 .

528 .

Using Advanced Features 529 .

530 .

Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to select a panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Unlike windows. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. 531 . To switch panel types. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. grid lines. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and you can change these elements individually. For example. you need to change the length of the wall. Like windows. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and they are not windows. This affects the entire curtain system. to resize the system. and mullions. you select the grid. or you can use a specific curtain system command. panel. Like walls. you create a curtain system using the wall command. To change grids. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. click Wall. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\i_Curtain_Walls. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector.

7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and double-click Southeast Isometric. Creating an Entrance | 533 .

you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. enter 4'0". and room bounding. and click (Properties). 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . top constraint. Click OK. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. using curtain grids. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. top and base attachments.11 Select the curtain system. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. For Top Offset.

22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Curtain Grid. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click Rename. and click OK. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Elevation 1 .a. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 18 In the Project Browser. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 4'0" above the ground floor level line. 20 In the drawing area. and resize the crop boundary as shown.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 23 Place another grid 5'0" above the first grid. click Elevation. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.

click Curtain Grid. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. one larger than the other. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. while pressing CTRL. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. FIFTH FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 25 On the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 26 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. and click OK. Click to create a vertical grid. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. FOURTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR.

watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. click Add or Remove Segments. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Click to place another grid line. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Creating an Entrance | 537 . you add a doorway to the curtain system. 33 On the Design Bar. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it.32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Next. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.

41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. select One Segment. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them.The two segments are removed. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. click Curtain Grid. 38 Using the same method.

click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 539 . 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Do not click between the 6-foot panels. You now have two 6-foot wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 43 Delete the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 4'0" above the ground floor. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click in any white space to exit the editor. Use the following image as a guide.

you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. under Floor Plans. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. Now. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. These panels schedule as doors. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. on the new curtain system you added. 52 On the Type Selector. you replace the 2 larger 6-foot panels with curtain system doors. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. They are part of the curtain panel category. . under Elevations. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and open Imperial\Families\Doors\Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 55 In the Project Browser. 51 Select the left 6-foot panel. click Training Files. not as curtain panels.Next. 54 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. click Modify.rfa. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Entrance Elevation. click view. and click Wireframe. 56 In the Project Browser. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 57 On the View Control Bar. The panel changes to a double door.

The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The glazed panels display in blue. 63 Click OK twice. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click . 61 With the panel still selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 In the Element Properties dialog.60 On the Type Selector. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. Creating an Entrance | 541 . 65 On the View Control Bar. click System Panel : Solid. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe.

9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. select Entire Grid Line. Name the file i_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 4'0" above the ground floor. there are a few that you do not want. because their width reduces the size of the doors. however. 6 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click Mullion. you place mullions on curtain panel grids.68 On the File menu. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next. clickModify. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. select Grid Line Segment. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .rvt. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.

14 Click the top mullion control. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 543 . Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Two mullion join controls display. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins.

Curved Curtain System In this lesson. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. you can also right-click. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Finally. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. click Wall. 5 Click . You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 15 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. under Floor Plans. 17 Save the file. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Southeast Isometric. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Finally. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you add a curtain system using the wall command. click Modify.The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed.

Adding a Curved Curtain System | 545 . (Arc passing through three points). specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. for Top Constraint. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. enter 4'0". For Top Offset. 7 On the Options Bar.6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK.

15 Zoom in to the cylinder. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. under Elevations. Next. Divide the halves into quarters. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. eighths. double-click East. and then sixteenths. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select the bottom layer of panels. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you change some panels in the system.16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. to filter out all 19 Save the file.12" . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Basic Wall: Generic . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 547 . 18 In the Type Selector. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Next. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box.

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 3 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, for Depth, enter 4". 6 On the Options Bar, click .

7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.

8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 9 Select the extrusion, and click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines. 12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. .

548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the family as Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fourth floor panels are selected. 21 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Panel - Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 23 Right-click, and click Change Walls Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar, click 25 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.

27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector, select System Panel - Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 549

The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
In this exercise, you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel, except at the GROUND FLOOR level.

For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, for Profile Usage, select Mullion, and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar:

Click

(Polygon). , and select it.

If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar, click
■ ■

For Sides, enter 8. Select Radius, and enter 2" for the radius.

10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Fine, and click OK. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Cylinder Mullion - detail.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 551

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Select the detail component, and click Visibility. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.rfa. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded, it can be added as a mullion type. 27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 28 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 31 Click .

32 In the Element Properties dialog, select Circular Mullion for Family. 33 Click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name, and click OK. 36 Under Construction, for Profile, select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice. 38 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE.

44 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson, you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and then apply those custom elements to the system.

Additional Curtain Systems
In this lesson, you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system, a storefront system, and a ruled curtain system.

Additional Curtain Systems | 553

Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.

7 On the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Family, select System Family: Sloped Glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level, enter 2' 0". Click OK.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar, select Entire Grid Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.

Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

Storefront System | 555

You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 8' 0". 6 Start the wall 4' 0" from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.

556 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

The curtain wall cuts the original wall.

8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 34' 0", and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall, and click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. For this wall, the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing, and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 5' 0". This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 5’ 0". The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance, and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 8'0". This means that the panel heights will be exactly 8', even if the wall height changes. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters, click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number

Storefront System | 557

is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 15. 16 Click OK.

17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 18 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid.

20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise, you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

Curtain System by Lines
In this exercise, you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.

558 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level, and highlight the model line.

Curtain System by Lines | 559

8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Select the panel, and click .

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.

560 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system, and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system, embed a curtain system inside another wall, and define a ruled curtain system.

Curtain System by Lines | 561

562

Roofs

15
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Creating Roofs

Creating an Extruded Roof

You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

Training File

Click File menu ➤ Open.

563

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

564 | Chapter 15 Roofs

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. centerline. Creating an Extruded Roof | 565 . To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. select Chain. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. sketch the roof profile.Next.

expand Sections (Type 1). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating an Extruded Roof | 567 . so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click Modify. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press CTRL.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 21 In the Project Browser. press TAB. and then select the exterior face of the wall. and double-click Section 1. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Views (all). and select the second wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 18 Select the edge of the roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Next.

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 568. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.24 On the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click model.

Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. expand Views (all). sketch the roof footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 569 . and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed.rvt. and double-click Garage Roof. click Pick Walls. and click Yes. i_Roofs. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. verify that Defines slope is selected.

(Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select both slope definition lines. 11 Press CTRL. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. under Dimensions. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15 On the View toolbar. Next. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click the model. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. and on the Options Bar. click (Properties). 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. click Modify. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 571. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. By default. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. clear Defines slope.

5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 571 . You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. press TAB.rvt. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 6 Click to select all the walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. sketch the chimney opening. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. clear Defines slope. and double-click Level 3. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. When you complete the roof. i_Roofs. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).

click Modify. click Lines. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. 8 On the Options Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 9 Using automatic snaps. click Finish Roof.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 15 On the Options bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click (Rectangle). add new slope lines to the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. Next.

1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 573. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.rvt. and click (Pick Lines). click Lines. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. close the roof sketch. click Pick Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select Defines slope. Next. i_Roofs. expand Views (all).19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 573 .

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. raise the roof 2' above the current level. 11 To trim the first line segment. 14 Under Constraints. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and click OK. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. select the left vertical slope definition line. click (Trim/Extend). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Finish Roof. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level.

16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 575 . Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 576.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 23 On the Tools toolbar. i_Roofs. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 8 On the Tools toolbar. clear Defines Slope. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 577 . 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 6 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a slope-defining line. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang.1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click (Trim/Extend). 10 To trim the first line segment. click Pick Walls. press TAB. Next. and double-click Level 2. Next. select the left vertical roof line. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. i_Roofs. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 3 On the Options Bar. 16 Under Constraints. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand 3D Views. click Modify. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. select Defines slope. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. (SteeringWheels). expand Views (all).rvt. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. and double-click Level 2. 19 On the View toolbar. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. expand Floor Plans. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. click 20 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 13 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and double-click 3D. and click OK.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. click Ref Plane. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. you need to add two reference planes. 7 On the Options Bar. Next. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 9 On the Tools menu. To help locate the position of each split. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. click Split Walls and Lines. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 579 . click (Pick Lines). Next. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . click Modify.15 to add the second slope arrow.5 On the View menu. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. add two new slope arrows. click Slope Arrow. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Before you can add slope arrows. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

18 Press CTRL. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). enter 6'' for Rise/12". This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 580. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 20 Under Dimensions. the adjacent eave heights must align.rvt. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 3 On the Options Bar. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. The eave lines display with a dimension. When eave heights differ. 5 On the Options Bar.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and then click OK. (Properties). click Edit. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. select both slope arrows. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. and click OK. When aligning eaves. select Slope for Specify. and click 19 Under Constraints. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and move the cursor to place the arrow. select Defines Slope. i_Roofs. enter 12'' for Rise/12". click Modify. When you sketch a hip roof. under Dimensions. expand Views (all). (Properties). The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Align Eaves. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the View toolbar.Next. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. click Save As. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. on the File menu. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 581. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select a method to align the eaves. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 581 .

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. 6 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations. (Properties). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. Next. under Constraints. click Modify. 3 Select the roof and. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click North.1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.

and then select Defines slope. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and select the remaining three lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.10 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 583 . click Modify. click mansard roof. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click . click (Pick Lines). and click OK. click Save As. under Dimensions. 17 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 584. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. After you add the roof. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Pick Walls. you add a roof to a building shell. double-click Roof. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.

select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. verify that Defines slope is not selected.4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click (Trim/Extend). Because the walls are not continuous. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 7 On the Tools toolbar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.

select Steel Truss . 10 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. and click OK. double-click the section head to open the section view. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. click Finish Roof. for Type. click Roof Properties. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.Insulation on Metal Deck .EPDM.

but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. under Floor Plans. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 587 . double-click Roof. 18 Move the cursor down.The roof has been created. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. In the next steps. and click to select it. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. click (Draw Split Lines). 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line.

move the cursor horizontally to the left. 20 Using the same method. (Add points). add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. on the Options Bar. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.You create a split line vertically down the center. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. and select a point on the opposite roof line. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section.

You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 23 On the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. 25 Using the same method. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. You modify the points individually. for the dimension. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 589 . enter -2''.In this exercise.

27 Press and hold CTRL. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and press ENTER. including the interior edges of the roof regions. enter 4''. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 29 On the Design Bar. for Elevation. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. click Modify.

and on the Options Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. The entire slab is sloped. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 31 Select the roof slab. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. By making the insulation layer variable. for the Thermal/Air Layer. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. select Variable. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. under Construction. 36 View the results in the section view.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 35 Click OK 3 times. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Edit. for Structure. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. click (Properties). In some cases this type of slope is desired. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 591 .

5 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and soffits. and Soffits on page 592. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. Gutters. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Fascia. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. on the File menu. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Save As. Gutters.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. select Fascia-Built-Up. click Training Files. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click (Properties). and click Open. and open Common\c_Condominium.rfa. Creating Fascia.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. After you create a roof. click Training Files. 37 If you want to save your changes. you can easily create its fascia. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn how to create roof fascia. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Press CTRL. gutters.rvt.

12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. and click OK. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. and click OK twice. click Duplicate. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia | 593 . 8 In the Name dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters on page 594.

rvt. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Properties dialog. and click OK three times. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click (Properties). 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 2 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating Gutters In this exercise. under Construction. click Edit/New. click in the Value field for Material. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. . select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. 10 Click to place the gutter. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Duplicate. and click OK. 594 | Chapter 15 Roofs . c_Condominium.

Creating Soffits In this exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Views. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. c_Condominium. click Pick Roofs. Creating Soffits | 595 .rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Soffits on page 595.

click Finish Sketch. expand 3D Views. 596 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Join Geometry. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. 8 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu. 6 In the Project Browser.4 Select the roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar.

click Save As. Creating Soffits | 597 .9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

598 .

click the Area Schemes tab.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. click Settings. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. View predefined area schemes 1 In the Project Browser. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. In the final exercise. expand Views (all). You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Finally. right-click in the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. your values will be different. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. 599 . click Training Files. If you are using metric units. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.rvt. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. 3 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. expand Floor Plans. and click Room and Area. 2 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Area.

600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Click OK. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. the system-computed height defaults to the level.There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. 4 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. 5 Click Cancel. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. These schemes define spatial relationships. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Create a gross building area plan 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. or 0. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to 4 feet or above the level. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. it is not necessary in this exercise. 7 In the New Area Plan dialog. click the Room Calculations tab. click Area Plan.

13 In the New Area Plan dialog. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. rather than the area tag. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 601 . To modify the area. Click OK. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you must select one of the reference lines. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). Next. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 9 In the Project Browser. you create a new area plan for rentable space. common areas. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and store area. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. click Area Plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 11 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must manually add these boundary lines. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. When you select Yes in this dialog. If you select No.8 When the informational dialog displays. forming a closed loop. under Views (all).

click Area Boundary. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click Area. If you do not select this option. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 18 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 20 In the upper left corner of the building model. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. you can either draw them or pick them. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type.14 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 15 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 19 On the Design Bar. When you pick the walls. When you add area boundary lines. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Add area boundary lines 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls.

21 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Modify and select the area. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 27 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Modify. 22 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 26 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. and click to select the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 603 . click Area. 23 On the Options Bar.

do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. enter Core for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 30 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 604 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click ■ ■ ■ . and select Store Area for Area Type.28 On the Options Bar. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 Add an area to the building model core. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Click OK. Click OK. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. In the Element Properties dialog. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.

In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.Notice that within the two store areas. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 605 . name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. In the next exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. 33 On the File menu.rvt. and click to place the legend. 34 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save.

Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 606 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Area Type and click Add.3 When the dialog displays. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Under Available fields. under Category. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. select Areas (Rentable). and click OK.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 607 .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

608 .

In this tutorial. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. If you modify a massing face. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. or both. and perimeter information. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. floor. roofs. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. curtain systems. 609 . and floors. you then need to update the building face. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. At any time. volume. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. After you make building elements. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. you can specify the view to display massing elements. floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and roofs. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. After creating mass floors. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You assign the default wall.

5 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Massing. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. sweeps.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and cutting geometry. under Views (all). click Create Mass. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Start. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.

12 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. and on the Options Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. (Line). and click OK.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 15 On the View Control Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 1. and on the Options Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 13 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. select Mass (Opaque). click 18 On the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 611 . This means the sketch line is placed 5 feet from the position you pick with the cursor. enter 5'0". for Offset. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click . enter 80'0". 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Constraints. under Floor Plans. for Name. (Pick Lines). for Extrusion End.

and click OK. for Extrusion Start. The second form is on top of the first form. and click . and click OK. under Constraints. highlight the larger form. select Mass (Transparent). click Extrusion Properties. for Extrusion End. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. for Name. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results. under Materials and Finishes. 23 In the Materials dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . enter 80'0". under Views (all). click Finish Sketch. under Views (all). select Pick a plane. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click West. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Work Plane dialog.20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 30 In the drawing area. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 26 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. enter 90'0". and click OK.

31 Click to select the face. click (Draw). click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. and clear Chain. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 613 . 34 On the Options Bar.TIP If necessary. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. press TAB to highlight the entire face. (Pick Lines). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and on the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.

click Modify. and delete the vertical construction line. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu.36 Sketch a line 19 feet up as shown. click (Move). TIP If you do not see this option. 37 On the Options Bar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click (Arc passing through three points). 614 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Blend Properties. click Finish Sketch. on the Options Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. (Arc passing through three points). and that -300'0" is specified for Second End. double-click East. for Material. 52 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 53 On the View toolbar. 50 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. (Line). and click OK. under Views (all).Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click 49 Create an arc as shown. 48 On the Options Bar. click Lines and. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 615 .

i_Massing_Start. double-click Level 1. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.54 Proceed to the next exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.rvt. In the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. select the mass. under Floor Plans. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 2 In the drawing area. click Ref Plane. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 616. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. In this exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .

These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 9 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click (Default 3D View). 13 On the Design Bar. When sketching each extrusion. 17 On the View toolbar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 Place another reference plane 50' to the right of the first reference plane.4 On the Options bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. and place the first reference plane 50' to the right. on the View Control Bar. 15 Click OK. click (Line). 7 Using the same technique. 14 Under Constraints. as shown. and select Chain. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. snap the corners to the intersections. NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. for Extrusion End. place 3 more reference planes 50' apart from left to right. click Lines. click Extrusion Properties. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. enter 0. enter 40'0" and for Extrusion Start. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click (Pick Lines) and enter 50' for Offset. 16 On the Design Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 617 . click Finish Sketch.

you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. under Floor Plans. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.In this exercise. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. and click Lines. double-click Level 1.rvt. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. click Sketch 2D Path. i_Massing_Start.

Using Swept Blends | 619 .■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. click Finish Path. 6 On the Design Bar. Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. select a point below the mass elements. The only way to align these elements is visually. ■ For the radius.

and press ESC. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. and click Edit. 9 On the Options Bar. and sketch a 20' x 20' rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Default 3D View). Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click (Rectangle). click (Align). click Profile 1. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 15 On the Design Bar. click Profile 2. 10 On the Design Bar.Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click Finish Profile. as shown. verify that <By Sketch> is selected.

(The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.17 Using the same method. select Mass (Transparent). 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click <By Category>. and click . Using Swept Blends | 621 . Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Finish Profile. click Finish Swept Blend. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. as shown: ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. 22 Click OK twice. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties.

you create new family types from a mass family file. In this exercise.rvt. 26 Save the file as i_Massing_Complete. click Finish Mass.24 On the Design Bar. Finally. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .

enter 50'0". and for Name. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. click New. and for Name. Creating New Mass Family Types | 623 . for Depth. 6 For Width. and click Apply. enter 35'0". and click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 60'0". for Height. 9 Click OK. for Depth. enter 15'0". enter 150' x 15' x 35'.rfa. In this exercise. 5 Click New.rfa. and click Apply. enter 225'0". and click OK. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 40'0". 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. for Width. 7 Click New. click Family Types. for Height. under Other. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Massing\Box. enter 225' x 30' x 60'. click Training Files. for Depth.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 30'0". enter 50' x 60' x 40'. for Height. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 60'0". 8 For Width. enter 150'0".

3 On the View Control Bar. on the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa family files. double-click Site. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. You also load other existing mass families and place them.rfa. and open the Imperial\Families\Massing folder. 8 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass.rfa. select Box-Training: 225' x 30' x 60'. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 6 Open the Box-Training. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Massing_In-place. click Training Files. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 1 If not already selected. under Views (all).rfa. and Triangle. as shown. Arc Dome. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. Semi Barrel Vault. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .

for the Material parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. select the 3 boxes. and click OK twice. 25 In the drawing area. select the triangle. 23 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the mass. and click OK twice. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 625 . click Place Mass. specify Mass (Transparent). click (Element Properties). enter 90 for Angle. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. select Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40'. and on the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and click (Element Properties).10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 Press CTRL. select Triangle: 50' x 150' x 35'. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). select Rotate after placement. 11 Select the box. as shown. for the Material parameter. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. click (Default 3D View). 33 On the View toolbar. select Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35'. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

rvt file. click (Default 3D View). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements | 627 . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. In this exercise. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you join these mass elements. NOTE When you join geometry. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the i_Massing_In-place. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. In the next exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. (Join Geometry).

click (Mirror). double-click Site.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' mass element as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' as shown. under Views (all). 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . on the Edit toolbar.

click (Default 3D View). 17 Press ESC to see the result. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' first. as shown.8 On the Options Bar. for Axis. Joining Mass Elements | 629 . (Join Geometry). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and then select the triangle. click (Draw). enter SM. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box.

The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_In-place. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. and select the triangle mass element.In this exercise.rvt. do not clear the check mark. 1 On the Design Bar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. click Modify. (If Design Options is already selected. you joined mass elements together. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 8 On the Options Bar. clear Curved. and click OK twice. under Floor Plans.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. select Arc Dome: 20'R x 9'H. 14 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. 17 In the Type Selector. select Sloped (primary). Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 631 . 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. and click (Element Properties). under Views (all). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. for the Material parameter. enter 90. click Place Mass. double-click Site. 5 In the Project Browser. select Semi Barrel Vault: 35' x 50' x 25'. for Angle. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click OK.

click Modify. under Views (all). and watch the status bar. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 23 On the View Control Bar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 20 In the drawing area. under Elevations. clear Sloped. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . While pressing CTRL. and click OK twice. and click OK. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. specify Mass (Transparent). click (Add to Design Option Set). double-click {3D}. and click (Element Properties).TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. for the Material parameter. double-click North. TIP To find the correct shapes. select the three arc domes. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. under 3D Views. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. under Views (all). select Curved. 28 In the Project Browser.

rvt. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. under Option. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Make Primary. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click the Design Options tab. 34 Close the warning that displays. 35 On the File menu. select Curved and. In this exercise. 33 In the Design Options dialog. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 31 Click the value for Design Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 633 .29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Close. click (Design Options). and click OK. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you can make it the primary option. click Save As and save the file as i_Massing_Design_Options. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

and open Imperial\i_Massing_Building_Components. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Training Files. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Wall by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 6 On the Options Bar. and for Loc Line. 5 In the Type Selector. click (Pick Faces). double-click {3D}. select Wall Centerline. you pick massing faces to create walls.rvt. under Views (all). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Brick on CMU. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 635 . 16 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). under Views (all). ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. under Views (all).

If desired. click Wall by Face. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. double-click Level 9. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. under Views (all).

Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. and Walls. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. and exterior surface area. When you select levels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 6 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. select all levels. and click OK. click Modify. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. 3 On the Model Categories tab. perimeter. click Mass Floors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels.In this exercise. 4 Click OK. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 8 On the Design Bar.rvt. volume. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 637 . Curtain Systems.

select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the three 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements and the mirrored 150' x 15' x 35' box masses as shown. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. click Modify.

16 On the Options Bar. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 225' x 30' x 60' box mass element as shown. and click OK. select Level 1. 15 Press CTRL. click Mass Floors.14 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 639 . 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.

select Floor Area.rvt. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 Using the same method. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Mass Floor. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Floor Perimeter. under Category. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Volume. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.In this exercise. The Floor Area. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. under Available fields. and click Add. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). schedules can be created using the mass floors. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. and select Level.

Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. and click OK. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Usage. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. enter Retail. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Sort by. Mass Family Box-Training: 50'x60'x40' Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 641 . 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Mass: Family and Type.

and click Properties. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 14 Select Level. and click Remove. 13 With Usage selected.Mass Family Box-Training: 150'x15'x35' Box-Training: 225'x30'x60' Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 35'x50'x25' Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Other. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. under Scheduled fields (in order). expand Schedules/Quantities. for Fields. After you assign usage. select Mass: Family and Type. click Edit. and click Move Up until Level is listed second.

click Edit. and select Grand totals. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Usage. for Then by. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. under Other. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and in the field below. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. for Filter by. elevation. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 18 On the Filter tab.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Rename. 24 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Formatting tab. 27 Click OK twice. under Other. select Calculate totals. under Fields. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 19 Click OK twice. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Hotel. for Sort by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and plan views. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. for Field formatting. select Floor Area. and click Properties. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 643 . right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. in the field under Filter by. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Level.

you created mass floor schedules. under Views (all). 3 Select the top face of the left 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element as shown. floor perimeter. click Roof by Face. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. double-click {3D}. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. The mass floor schedules list. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . the floor area.In this exercise. by level.rvt.

and also on the top faces of the 150' x 15' x 35' box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element family. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 645 . Your model should now look as shown. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements.12". select Basic Roof : Generic .

8 Using the method you just learned. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 12 On the Options Bar. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 13 Using the same method. in the Type Selector. click Create Roof. and click OK. Curtain Systems. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. and Walls. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. In this exercise. select Curtain Panels. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Sloped Glazing.

1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System : 5' x 5'. 5 Press CTRL. 3 In the Type Selector. verify that Select Multiple is selected.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Curtain Systems | 647 . double-click {3D}. under Views (all). click Create System. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

click Create System.9 On the Options Bar. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 649 . create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).

Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command.rvt. In this exercise.

and click (Element Properties). and Walls. for Width. Curtain Systems. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. Roofs. under Views (all). 7 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. enter 105'0". 4 Select the box mass family as shown. and then click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 2 On the View menu.1 In the Project Browser. you resize one of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. and click OK. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 651 . under Floor Plans. Floors. Next. click Modify. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. clear Curtain Panels. double-click Site.

In the next steps. under Views (all). you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 652 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 In the Project Browser. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. double-click Level 1. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View Control Bar.

Also. click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Remake. 14 On the Options Bar. you want to select the smaller one. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 653 .TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 Select the roof as shown. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog.

654 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake. and click Remake.

In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 655 . 1 Open the 3D view. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. under Schedules/Quantities.20 In the Project Browser. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 9 Select Mass. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 656 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. click All to select all categories.The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Massing only. 4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}.

you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise. to the building shell. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 657 . You might create the model shown.

658 .

Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. 659 . When you make changes to a nested group. all instances in the building model are updated. or with those working on a different project. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. The new group is considered nested within the host group. place. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. the host group is also updated automatically. After you create a model group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. For example. By grouping objects. You mirror one instance of the group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Creating. you also simplify the modification process. In this tutorial. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In another exercise. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and modify repetitive units. you not only simplify their placement. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and typical office layouts. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. hotel rooms. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Modifying. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also nest groups within other groups. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). and double-click First Floor. click Training Files. enter ZR. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 2 Click in the drawing area. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.

Creating and Placing a Group | 661 . enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

click Modify. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar.

right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 663 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click Modify. under Groups.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 12 On the Design Bar.

clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click (Mirror). 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 665 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. one mirrored. as shown. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify.

and click Save. click Save As. When you finish editing. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click to select it. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. Modifying a Group | 667 . Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.).). and click to select the door. select the element. 4 Move the cursor over the door. NOTE To display an excluded element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. click Modify. and click to select the wall. 7 Click (Group Member. press TAB.). press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.3 Click (Group Member.). and click member to group instance. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

click Door. Modifying a Group | 669 . 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 11 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 14 On the Options Bar. click Wall. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left.

16 On the Design Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor up. 20 On the Options Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Edit Group. click Modify. 22 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. In edit group mode. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. All other elements in the model are grayed out.

to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 25 Select the opening. which acts as the host. (Element Properties). for Unconnected Height. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups In this exercise.24 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click 27 For Base Offset. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 7'. click Modify. created in an earlier lesson. 28 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 671 . All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. enter 3' 4''. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. you add the Typical Kitchen group.

3 On the Options Bar.rvt. select the Typical Kitchen group. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. in the Project Browser. click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.

under Floor Plans. Nesting Groups | 673 . 7 On the group editor toolbar. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors.

You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. such as door and window tags. 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. such as text. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. double-click First Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you add door tags to a group. In the next exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.

and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 675 . 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. click to draw a rectangular region. click Finish Sketch.

14 On the Edit toolbar. as shown. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Group). and click OK. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click to add an arc leader. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Text. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar.

double-click Second Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. Because the detail group contains variables. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area.18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 677 . Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. expand Detail.

NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. as shown. 678 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

click (Group). for Attached Detail Group Name. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 679 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. select Door Tags.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. therefore. 14 On the Options Bar. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File 680 | Chapter 18 Grouping . This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. click Modify. click Place Detail. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project.

click Desktop. under Groups\Model.rvt. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. and click Save.rvt. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. expand Groups. Saving and Loading Groups | 681 . explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click Modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save Group. browse to the Desktop. accept the default template file. A warning dialog displays. and expand Model. for Create new. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click Open. In this case. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT).Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. verify that Project is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. 3 For File name. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Create Instance.

22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 24 In the message dialog. select the linked Revit model. 682 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click OK. click Use Existing. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Remove Link. click Link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Revit Links.rvt file is added as a link to the project.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt. When a group is converted to a link. verify that Attached Details is selected only. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and the link is removed. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog.

You add property lines manually. and then modify the data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. Using Site Tools In this lesson.Site 19 In this tutorial. convert the data to a table. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you add a building pad to the site. 683 . After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. In the final exercises. islands.

The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you create a toposurface using two different methods. The scale of this view is 1" = 20'. click Point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. In the second part of this exercise. Using the first method. expand Views (all). 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Site. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_First_Project. click Toposurface. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. enter an absolute elevation of 10' 0". you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.rvt This project file was created using the default imperial template. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Site. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 4 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Toposurface | 685 . Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 150' wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

and 60' absolute elevations. under Increment. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Finish Surface. click Site Settings. 40'. 9 Add a concentric circle of 20' 0" elevation points inside the 10' 0" contour. enter an absolute elevation of 20' 0".8 On the Options Bar. under Additional Contours. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 In the Site Settings dialog. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. enter 5' 0". 50'. Use the following illustration as a reference. 10 Repeat the previous step for 30'. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 14 On the View toolbar. enter 3' 0". modify the level names and elevations. click to delete it. Creating a Toposurface | 687 . on the Standard toolbar. under Views (all). 16 On the View toolbar. click the elevation value. Before importing the contour data. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and double-click South. 15 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. (SteeringWheels).

double-click Site. Click Open. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Until it is exploded. 28 On the Design Bar. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. under Floor Plans. For Layers. 29 Select the imported topography. select Preserve. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. Verify that Current view only is not selected. select Specify. click Training Files. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 30 On the Edit menu.21 Click the Level 2 text. click Modify. For Colors. click Pin Position. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. rename the level Basement. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 23 Click the Level 1 text. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Views (all). it is considered an import symbol. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. click Yes. and press ENTER.

clear Elevations. 32 On the View menu. 34 Under Visibility.This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. and then click OK. click Modify. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Visibility/Graphics. click Toposurface. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select it. click the Annotation Categories tab. 31 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. Creating a Toposurface | 689 . when the edges highlight. 36 On the Design Bar.

690 | Chapter 19 Site .When you select the import symbol. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. clear C_INDX. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click Finish Surface. click (SteeringWheels). you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. 40 On the View toolbar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 42 On the View toolbar.

Using the first method. this project file is required in its current state. you add property lines using two methods. click Lines.rvt. Adding Property Lines | 691 .44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Site-in progress.rvt. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Select and delete the right vertical line. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click Property Line. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. select Create property lines by sketching. name the project Site-in progress. Click Modify. Adding Property Lines on page 691. and click Save. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Using the second method. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.

select the lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. on the Standard toolbar. to delete them. click OK. click Property Line. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 8 On the Options Bar. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. when they highlight.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. select Edit Table. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click 12 On the Design Bar. click OK. add an arc line on the right. A warning dialog is displayed.

click to place the property lines. Adding Property Lines | 693 . enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 350' 0" S 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" W 350' 0" N 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 16 Click OK.14 In the Property Lines dialog. If the gap is not closed. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 15 Starting in Row #1. This means there is no gap in the property lines.

and click OK. The tags display more prominently in this view. 19 In the Tags dialog. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. clear Leader. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the View menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Training Files. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click to place it. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Visibility/Graphics.dwg and click OK. and click Drafting. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. Before adding property line segment tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 20 Click Load. 30 On the View Control Bar. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. right-click in the Design Bar. In the final step. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Civil\Property Line Tag. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695. 22 In the Tags dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 25 Under Visibility. this project file is required in its current state. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. you created two sets of property lines.Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . In this exercise.

Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following values: ■ Under Start. Under Line Color. for Subcategory. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 7 Click OK. Site-in progress. click New. select a shade of Brown. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Topography. 2 On the Settings menu.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.In the next exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. click Site Settings. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 695 . 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. and click OK. Under Line Pattern. enter 3' 0". 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. select Dash dot. under Contour Line Display. click Object Styles. specify an interval of 2' 0" passing through elevation 0' 0". In the Object Styles dialog. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. enter the name Working Contour.

12 Click File menu ➤ Close. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. select Working Contour. select Single Value. In the next exercise. 11 Click OK. Working Contour. parking areas. In this exercise. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . The next exercise requires a new training file. you create topographic subregions to define roads.■ ■ Under Range Type. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Subcategory. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. The object style subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 697.

2 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. and open Imperial\i_Site. click Lines. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. parking areas. Although the exact dimensions are not important. such as material. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. try to replicate the location and proportion. you create subregions in order to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.rvt. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and islands.Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise.

and click OK. the vertical rectangle is approximately 64' wide. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click to open the Materials dialog.TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 6 In the Materials dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 24' wide. enter Parking for Name. select Site . Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 8 On the Design Bar. click Properties. click the value for Material. and click OK. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. under Materials and Finishes.Asphalt for Name. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 698 | Chapter 19 Site .

9 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Asphalt. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Topography Schedule.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions, they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 18' deep to accommodate parking spaces.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 699

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased.

Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. In this training project, additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion, you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Subregion. 22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

700 | Chapter 19 Site

23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

24 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material, and click to open the Materials dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Grass for Name, and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Island - Grass for Name, and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 29 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

30 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 701

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island Grass, and apply the material Site - Grass.

32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar, click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway, and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Place Concrete - walkway.

702 | Chapter 19 Site

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 4".

37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 703

39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder, name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt, and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 41 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 704.

Grading the Toposurface
In this exercise, you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. When you use the grading tool, the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface.

704 | Chapter 19 Site

3 On the Options Bar, click

(Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 767. 6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 8 Select the topographic surface.

Grading the Toposurface | 705

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

10 Press DELETE.

706 | Chapter 19 Site

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished, and new.

11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Grading the Toposurface | 707

13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar, click Point. 15 On the Options Bar, specify an Absolute Elevation of 18' 0". 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

17 On the Design Bar, click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

18 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

708 | Chapter 19 Site

20 On the View toolbar, click to view it at various angles.

(SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu, click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify Existing for Phase, and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Therefore, only the original toposurface displays, because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project, you can delete it. 23 Select the toposurface, and delete it. 24 On the View menu, click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify New Construction for Phase, and click OK. Only the graded topography displays.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Building Pad on page 709.

Adding a Building Pad
In this exercise, you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element, nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad, it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.

Adding a Building Pad | 709

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Pad. NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 4 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

710 | Chapter 19 Site

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry, see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578.

7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new building pad.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Site Components on page 712.

Adding a Building Pad | 711

Adding Site Components
In this exercise, you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector, select Parking Space: 9' x 18' - 90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

712 | Chapter 19 Site

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

8 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

Adding Site Components | 713

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking spaces.

Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

714 | Chapter 19 Site

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

14 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

15 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adding Site Components | 715

4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag Planting Tag: Boxed. 716 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Apply. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 5 On the View menu. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. click Apply. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Hidden Line. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 716. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag Parking Tag: Boxed. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. under Floor Plans.

Tagging Site and Parking Components | 717 . you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. outside of the site. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Click again to the left to position the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. 8 On the Options Bar. to position the shoulder of the leader.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click up and to the left. In the following exercise.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 718 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Design Bar. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify.

Creating Parking Space Schedules | 719 . ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 719. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 14 On the Design Bar.

double-click Site. and click Add. 10 In the Project Browser. enter Space. click Close Hidden Windows. under Views (all). 4 Under Available fields. and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Window menu. click Schedule/Quantities. The parking schedule is displayed. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Type. select Parking for Category. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 In the Site plan. and under Heading. and click OK. 5 Under Available fields. 720 | Chapter 19 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. click the Fields tab. 7 Under Fields. enter Size. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 8 Under Fields. 9 On the Window menu. click Tile. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. and click Add.rvt. If necessary. under Floor Plans. and under Heading. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. select Mark. select Type.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering. finish numbering the remaining spaces. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. number the first three spaces consecutively. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 721 .13 In the Parking Schedule.

722 .

This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. and so on. To make a workset editable. and click Editable. A workset is a collection of building elements. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. In this tutorial. such as annotations and dimensions. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. called Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. When you are working on a shared project. use Element Borrowing. All other team members can view this workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. You can enable Worksharing for any project. 723 . architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. floors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you must first enable Worksharing. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Using Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. stairs. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you specify an active workset. After the project is shared. they cannot make changes to it. Elements specific to a view. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. however. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. doors. select the desired workset. such as walls. go to the Worksets dialog.

Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In the next exercise. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In a multi-story structure. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. such as a tenant interior. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. When setting up Worksharing. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Team size 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. After learning the fundamentals. Instead.

Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Regardless of the default setting. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Experience has shown that. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. When creating the new worksets. Team member roles Typically. for a typical project. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. You should have at least one workset for each person. and View worksets. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 725 . not including the Project Standards. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. In most projects. with each assigned a specific functional task. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. As new members create worksets for their own use. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. designers work in teams. On this tab. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. When you create a new workset. Shared Levels and Grids.

within the local file. you can select which workset is active. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. your changes are saved. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. On the Options Bar. When you save to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you should then save to your local file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . your changes propagate to the entire team. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. When you save locally (to your local file). it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. However. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. the file is saved as the central file. if a workset named Interior was created. After saving to the central file. Therefore. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. When you save to the central file. As you work. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. however. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When finished or at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Generally. For example. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you make that workset editable by you.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This makes them available to other team members. proceeds as usual.

Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 727 . change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. In this instance. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. if you know who checked out the required workset. you should check out the Materials workset. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. and then save the local file. using VPN. save to the central file. In this situation. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. and make that workset editable. make any required worksets editable. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. for instance. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. In this conceptual exercise. reload the latest changes from the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. When working remotely. Alternatively. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. To do this. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.

It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. 3 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets dialog displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Your username displays as the present owner. click Training Files. under Show. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.In the next exercise. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. click Worksets. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. and notice all are editable by you. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.

imagine four users including yourself. For training purposes. and double-click Level 1. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 16 In the drawing area. another is assigned the interior layout. 9 Click New. In this case. it is better to make them visible by default. currently named Workset1. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. expand Views (all). 8 Click OK. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. click OK. You do. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. and Views. When you initially activate Worksharing. clear Visible by default in all views. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. expand Floor Plans. Project Standards. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. click New. In this simple training project. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 729 . Because the interior walls appear in many views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 14 In the Worksets dialog.When you enable worksharing. however. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. select Workset1. Therefore. 12 Click Rename. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 13 In the Rename dialog. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Only User-Created worksets should display. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. type the name Exterior Shell. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and click OK. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. a small number of team members are working on the building model. In this training file. ■ 5 Under Show. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. clear Families. you can rename the default workset. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. For example. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".

28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. stairs. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Select all of the interior elements. and click OK. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the View menu. under Identity Data.17 On the Options Bar. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. under Identity Data. and walls. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 Click OK. click . 20 Select one of the interior walls. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Identity Data. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click the Worksets tab. select Interior Layout for Workset. click . including the interior doors. 29 Click OK. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click Visibility/Graphics. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 24 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 39 Click Save. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 731 . The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 42 On the right side of the dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. double-click Level 2. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 41 In the Worksets dialog.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. select Interior Layout for Workset. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. under Identity Data. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 34 In the drawing area. click Save As. 35 On the Options Bar. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 32 Select Interior Layout. under Views (all). select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Non Editable. 38 In the Save As dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. If any interior elements remain. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 43 Click OK. click . You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. In this exercise. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 44 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. click Close. 30 On the View menu. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Worksets. Now that you have created the central file. click Visibility/Graphics. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.

click Open. 11 In the Worksets dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If you have not yet completed the exercise. select the central file. select all the User-Created worksets. check out worksets. click Worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. you create your local file.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and click Save. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In addition. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Specify. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Next. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 6 On the File menu. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 12 Click OK. make modifications to the building model. and click OK. 13 On the Window menu. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Save As. 4 Click Open. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. click Options. and click OK. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 728. 7 In the Save As dialog. In this case. select Interior Layout. and select Yes for Editable. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 2 In the Open dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select Interior Layout for Name. Before working on the model. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You have created a local file which is for your use only. please do so before continuing.

but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. however. Because this element is not owned by another user. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. and click OK. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 21 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. If this is selected. notice the Editable Only option. you can still edit this wall. 20 Under Constraints. click Modify. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 23 On the File menu. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. In this case.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. In the Worksets dialog. Verify that it is cleared. 24 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Working Individually with Worksets | 733 . click . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. click . On the Options Bar. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. If it was owned by another user.

32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . 34 In the Type Selector. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 26 Delete the door. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. The precise location is not important. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr).

For training purposes. you created your local file. make elements editable. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. please do so before continuing. it is recommended. In addition. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. By default. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Save to Central. At the end of a work session. a tooltip. If you have not yet completed these exercises. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. When working in your local file. and reload the latest changes. Throughout the process. save to central. each user must check out worksets. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. and save locally immediately afterward. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In this exercise. which matches the information in the Status Bar. You modified the building model. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 735 . Borrowed Elements is selected. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. checked out worksets. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. In this particular case. Whenever you save. displays the workset as well as the element type. two users access the central file through a network connection. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you should perform regular saves. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you should relinquish all worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. leave this file open in its current state. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. add two door openings into the rooms you created.

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. select all the User-Created worksets. 15 On the File menu. skip the following section. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. You now have a local copy of the project. User 2: Create a local file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. For training purposes.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. specifically sequenced. one user has already created a local file. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 12 In the Save As dialog. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and click OK. and click OK. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and select Specify. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. This file is for your use only. click Save As. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click Save. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 11 On the File menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. click Open. and click OK. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. click Options. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. In addition. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. instructions are staggered. enter User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. and select Yes for Editable. select the central file. and reset the Username to your computer login name. return to the Settings dialog. under Username. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 3 On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. In the following section of this exercise. 9 Click Open. 7 In the Open dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. consider that person to be User 1. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. click Options. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).rvt. click Worksets. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 4 Click the General Tab and.

” 29 Click OK. open it now. expand Floor Plans. 23 Click OK. expand Views (all). User 1: Check out worksets. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset.You are now the owner of that workset. If it is not open. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and double-click Level 1. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. 19 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the lower exterior wall. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 17 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. If you only have one workset checked out. click Worksets. 27 On the File menu. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. it becomes the active workset. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. click Save to Central. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 737 . That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. modify the building model. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration.

under Floor Plans. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Save to Central. 44 In the Project Browser. 33 On the File menu. and click OK. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. User 1: Reload latest worksets. Click Yes. click Reload Latest. 41 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Worksets. The changes User 2 made are apparent. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 738 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . When you save to central. you should create a furniture plan view. 37 On the File menu. right-click Level 1.” 39 Click OK. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. 46 In the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. Before adding any furniture. under Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser.” 35 Click OK. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. However. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and click Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

Therefore. 48 In the Type Selector. and click OK.200mm. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 62 On the File menu. NOTE System families. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. such as Wall Types. click Component. 66 On the File menu. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select Project Standards. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 53 On the File menu. rather than Families. and click OK. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Worksets. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Rename. click Save to Central. and click Element Properties. 50 On the View menu. click Reload Latest. 60 In the Rename dialog. under Show.” 55 Click OK. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 739 . click Visibility/Graphics. 49 On the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab. click Modify. and click inside any room. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 61 Click OK 2 times.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. enter Exterior Wall . click Save to Central. click Edit/New. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 65 Click OK. choose any desk. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. are placed under Project Standards. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.

you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 70 On the File menu. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). This exercise requires two users and. 740 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. select Save to Central. In the left pane of the Open dialog. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 3 In the Save As dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Checking out worksets. Each user must have network access to the central file. There are specific instructions for each user. In subsequent steps. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 740. As each of you work. modified the building model.rvt. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. select the following. and still have your local files open. throughout this training. leave this file open in its current state. leave this file open in its current state. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. you need to set up your central and local files. click Save As. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. finished the previous workset exercises. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. and save 69 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you save the training file as a central file. Each user checked out worksets. and click OK. click Options. and these problems are rectified. User 1: Reload latest. select Reload Latest. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. At the appropriate point in this exercise.

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 13 In the Open dialog. Set the Username to User 2. 15 Click Open. click Options. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 8 In the Save As dialog. 17 On the File menu. 5 Click Save. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. On the Settings menu. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click OK. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and select Specify. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 12 On the File menu. click Open. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Options. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Next.4 In the File Save Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. The central file should still be open. return to the Settings dialog. This is a system setting. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 741 . This is the local file for User 1. You have created a local file which is for your use only. In addition. and click OK. click Options. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. and click Save. click Save As. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 6 On the File menu. select Make this a Central File after save.

if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. double-click Level 1. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. After you submit the request. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You are now the owner of that workset. and then click OK. 24 Under Active Workset. and then click OK. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. select the Interior Layout workset. 742 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. Afterwards. At this point. 26 In the Worksets dialog. click the File menu. 30 On the left exterior wall. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and select Yes for Editable. select them. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and click Editing Requests. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 29 On the Options Bar.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select the second window from the top. select Exterior Shell. select Interior Layout. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and click Open. and select Yes for Editable. under Floor Plans. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. click Worksets. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 27 Under Active Workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall.

38 Click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. to Local. and click OK. and close 39 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. select Save to Central. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. select the following. 35 Click Grant.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and the other user granted it. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 743 . 36 Click Close. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. click Close. In this case. select the request submitted by User 2. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. you requested permission to edit the element. click Check Now. In this multi-user exercise.

744 .

you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In addition. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. In this tutorial. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. 745 . you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. For example. At any time in the design process. Using design options.

you can edit it. After you create a design option. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. therefore. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. under Option Set. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the second exercise. click Training Files. each is constructed for interchangeability. the roof and structure systems must work together. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you design each of the structural options. make your final design decision. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you set up multiple design option sets. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House.In this particular case. and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the first exercise in this lesson. In the final exercise of this lesson. click New. The client has asked you to create various options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. each with multiple design options. TIP In this exercise. the only available command is to create a new option set. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. With the second option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. and the third column centered between the two. 11 On the Edit toolbar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. expand Floor Plans. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and click Close. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 7 In the Type Selector. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. By selecting Multiple. In the following illustration. expand Views (all). 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. TIP To center the middle column. click Edit Selected. add three columns.3 Select Option 1 (primary). click Modify. In this case. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Column. click 12 On the Options Bar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. select: ■ ■ ■ .

748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . 17 Zoom out and. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. using the same technique.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 18 On the View toolbar. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added.

22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column.Notice the 12 columns that you added. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. under Floor Plans. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Next. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 19 In the Project Browser. select Round Bar : 2". and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. you add the beams that span the columns. In it. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the beam start point. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Beam. click Modify. 23 On the Design Bar. Zoom in on the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. double-click TOP OF CORE. 21 In the Type Selector.

Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and click the center point. and select the center of the column to add a copy. select: ■ ■ ■ . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar.25 On the Edit toolbar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. click .

NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option Set. 40 In the Rename dialog. click New. 45 Under Roofing. select Option 1 (primary). 34 In the Design Options dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 751 .Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). enter Beam for New. 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 46 Under Option. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename. and click OK. enter Structure for New. 38 In the Rename dialog. click New. click Rename. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. enter Roofing for New. not a new option set. click New. under Option Set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 43 In the Rename dialog. under Option. name the option Louvers. under Option. under Option. enter Brackets for New.

Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 48 Under Option. click Rename. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. Under Now Editing. and click OK. 50 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. select Beam. This allows you to more easily manage the project. When finished. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Option 2. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. select Edit Selected.47 Under Roofing. 52 Click Close. it will resemble the following illustration. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 53 In the Project Browser. 51 Under Edit. under Floor Plans.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Creating the Structural Design Options | 753 . 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. click Align. click Component.

Click to indicate the end point of the move. 61 On the Design Bar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. on the Edit toolbar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 62 Select the beam and. The second click represents the move end point. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. name the file. click . 66 On the View toolbar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 755 . That is because the brackets option is set to primary.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. and click Save. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 68 In the Design Options dialog. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Save As. you need this file in its current state. click Finish Editing. i_Urban_House-in progress.rvt. 70 On the File menu. 69 Click Close. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 67 On the Tools menu. which is visible by default. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 5 Click Close. 6 In the Project Browser. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. do so now. expand Floor Plans. a Louver system. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. the other for beams. 8 In the Type Selector. select Louvers (primary). you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. If you need to add dimensions.rvt. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 10 Referring to the following illustration. Under Now Editing. select Rafter 2 x 10. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. open it now. each with multiple design options to pick from. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Sunscreen. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. you design each of the roofing options. 2 On the Tools menu.In this exercise. click Edit Selected. With the second option. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 4 Under Edit. you set up multiple design option sets. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. The first option. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. delete them after the rafter is in place. under Roofing. The second roofing system. expand Views (all). click Component. In the next exercise.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 757 . under Other. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select 2nd for Move To. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Select Constrain. enter 38' 6" for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. click Modify. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click . 15 On the Edit menu. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Enter 5 for Number. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Array. 13 On the Options Bar.

you can enter 3 3. enter 3' 3". The space separates feet and inches.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. For example. TIP When entering a dimension value. rather than entering 3' 3". Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

and press Enter. Select Constrain. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click OK. select Louver 2 x 6. 20 In the Type Selector. when the listening dimension displays. click the Edit menu. and click Array. and. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 For the array starting point. 25 With the louver still selected. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click . click Component. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. under Other. 26 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 759 . 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Enter 34 for Number. and select the louver you just placed. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter 1’.

click . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. The louver roof system is complete.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. click Finish Editing. under Edit. 29 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Tools menu.

You will fix this in a later step. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 Select the top of the left column. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. the top of the next column on the right. select Sunscreen. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Click OK. and click OK. expand Elevations. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. under Roofing. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. In this case. 40 On the Options Bar. and then click Close. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. and the third point defines the arc. 33 Under Editing. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. click Edit Selected. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. click Properties. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. The first two points define the ends of the line. click . then you can modify it through the dimension. and double-click West. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 761 . Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. Therefore. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views.

was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. Select the right arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 46 On the Tools menu. a Louver system. 762 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Sketch. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. The arcs should connect. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. click Finish Editing. click Trim/Extend. Sunscreen. and then click Close. 49 On the View toolbar. you designed each of the roofing options. The first option. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 48 On the Design Bar. click . The roof sketch must be a continuous line. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. you need this file in its current state. 52 On the File menu. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 50 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The second roofing system. 45 Click OK. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. then the center arc. Under Constraints. Under Constraints. click Save.44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Edit. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. In this exercise.

double-click Primary Option. and last options. and click Rename. click the Design Options tab. 11 On the View menu. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. expand 3D Views. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. After exploring the combinations. and delete the discarded design options. secondary. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. make it part of the building model. and click Rename. 10 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. double-click Secondary Option. enter Primary Option.Managing Design Options In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. tertiary. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. you select a design. under Views (all). 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. under 3D Views. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Managing Design Options | 763 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). right-click {3D}. under Views (all). do so now. 5 Right-click each of the copies. click Visibility/Graphics.

and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. under Views (all). 764 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 18 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 19 On the View menu. 15 On the View menu. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option.

click Yes. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 26 Under Option Set. 31 In the alert dialog. click Delete. the beam option becomes part of the model. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Managing Design Options | 765 . 22 On the Tools menu. 24 Under Option. select Beam. the current primaries are no longer options. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. An alert is displayed. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 25 Select Structure.At this point. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 29 Select Roofing. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. In this case. 33 In the Design Options dialog. The set is deleted. click Close. 30 Under Option Set. In your design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 27 In the alert dialog. since you no longer need them. but should be accepted as part of the building model. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. Because the client has selected the design option. under Structure. click Delete to remove the views that used options. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. double-click Primary Option. This was the client choice for structural. click Yes. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. select Make Primary. click Accept Primary.

In this exercise. made it part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. 35 On the File menu. click Save.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you selected a design. After exploring the combinations. 766 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. demolish existing walls and doors. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. complete with schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. For the client. This changes room definition and total building model area. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. 767 . In the second exercise. and then add new building model elements.Project Phasing 22 In any project. You create new phases. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing construction. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.

under Phasing. This means that all building model elements. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. click Training Files. 4 Click Cancel. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. click (Element Properties). and None is selected for Phase Demolished. As you add new elements to the building model. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. click Project Units. In the Element Properties dialog. you do not need to change the project units to metric. During the demolition and renovation process. click Modify. are visible in this view.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 7 Click Cancel. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. If you wish to do so. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. define the units. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. expand Floor Plans. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties.rvt. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. When you create a new project. regardless of phase. and click OK. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. go to the Settings menu. and open Common\c_Phasing.

and click OK. 17 Click No. 11 In the Filter dialog. enter Level 1 . and click Rename. clear Door Tags. select Existing. under Floor Plans. under Phasing. 20 In the Rename dialog. Phasing Your Model | 769 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. TIP If this were a multi-story building. all of the building model elements. right-click Level 1.Existing. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 10 On the Options Bar. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. and click OK. Because this is a phase-specific view. are highlighted in red. for Phase Created. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. click Modify. enter Level 1 . and click OK.Existing. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. After you release the mouse button. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 . click . After you create the views.Existing. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction.Demo. click (Filter Selection). including the door tags.

The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. On a logical time line. however. select Existing. to which all the building model elements belong. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Phase status is time-dependent. under Floor Plans. Demolished. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 29 For Composite Plan. select Overridden. Because of this time relationship. and click OK. you modify these settings. and Temporary. new construction occurs after existing construction. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. You may need to zoom in to see this. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . 26 In the Phasing dialog. In this case.Existing. Next. double-click Level 1 .Demo. 24 In the Project Browser.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. under New. enter Composite Plan. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. for Phase. 27 Click New. under Floor Plans. Existing. 28 Under Filter Name. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . There are five default phase filters. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Later in this exercise. under Phasing. click the Phase Filters tab.

As you click each wall. under Floor Plans. you begin demolition. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. Phasing Your Model | 771 . There are two ways to demolish an element. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. select red. When you demolish the host. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 32 In the Demolished row. select Demolished. 35 Click OK twice. under Cut ➤ Lines. 39 In the Phasing dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. 36 Using the same method. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Next. its display changes to a red dashed line. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.31 Under Phase Status.Existing. 34 In the Color dialog. double-click Level 1 . 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. select the line style. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. click OK. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select a lighter blue. or you can use the demolish tool. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. double-click Level 1 . Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. click (Demolish). The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 42 In the Project Browser.Demo. click the value for Color. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. under Floor Plans.

52 Open Level 1 . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 53 Open Level 1 . select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". select Show Previous + New. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 772 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. under Phasing. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. and click OK.Existing. click Door.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). for Phase Filter. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Type Selector. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The demolished walls no longer display.Demo. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall. and click OK. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 49 On the Design Bar. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 50 In the Type Selector. add a long horizontal wall.

58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. right-click Level 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. regardless of phase.Demo. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 61 On the View Control Bar. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 62 If necessary. Phasing Your Model | 773 . Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. because the phase filter is set to Show All.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and existing shows as half-tone. click (Default 3D View). 59 Open Level 1 .New. The renovated building model plan is displayed. All elements are displayed in this view. which are displayed as red. 60 On the View toolbar. 57 In the Project Browser. new is shown in blue. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.New. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).

the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. expand Floor Plans. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. click Training Files. demolition. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags.rvt. and double-click Level 1 . If you wish to save this file. and new construction. sizes. and click OK. In the next exercise. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. click Project Units. As the renovation process continues. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. You can also see that the room quantities. expand Views (all). 3 Open Level 1 . go to the Settings menu. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. All room boundaries are phase-specific. you can do so at this time. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. 2 Open Level 1 . you do not need to change the project units to metric. define the units. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.Demo. In this exercise. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. the rooms change in both definition and size. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. Notice that this view is the original building model. 63 Close the file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. 774 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.New.Existing. you can see the new walls added to the building model. In this view. In this view. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. If you wish to do so. therefore.

click Room Tag. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 5 Click OK.New. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. yet they have different room numbers.Demo.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 775 . 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Open Level 1 .Existing. click in each room as you move to the right. 13 Open Level 1 . and maximize the view. In the Phasing dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click Room. Use the following illustration as a guide. 10 Open Level 1 .

both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 18 Open Room Schedule .New Construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 17 On the Window menu. click Tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 19 On the Window menu. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. In this case. The two schedule views tile. 20 Close the file. View phase-specific room schedules. and double-click Room Schedule . Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In this exercise. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases.Existing. expand Schedules/Quantities. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. 16 In the Project Browser. click Close Hidden Windows. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 776 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In addition.

A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Comparison of alternatives on a site. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. modify their visibility. 777 . you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. performance. You position the building models on the site plan. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and manage the links throughout the project. This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson. In these situations. In this tutorial. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context.

NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link two building models to the project. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Linking Building Models In this lesson. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. modify their visibility. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and the other is a townhouse. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You position the building models on the site. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. One building model is a condominium. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 795. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. right-click. however. Select c_Site.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . RELATED See the lesson. c_Condo_Complex. Auto . select the three files.■ Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . click Open. 2 On the File menu. All three files now reside. you can do so. Otherwise. click Training Files.rvt. in the Model Linking folder that you created. and click OK. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. click Save As. 5 On the File menu. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. 4 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user. and save the file there. and open Common\c_Site. this option will place the link at a predefined location. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. click Close. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. and click Properties. 8 Clear Read-only.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. This option is grayed out. c_Townhouse. ■ ■ Manual . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. with write permission. Manual . click Open.

select Auto .■ Click Open. For Positioning. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 11 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Floor Plans. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . expand Views (all). The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Notice the blue detail lines. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.Origin to Origin.

After you select it. 15 On the Edit toolbar. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The linked model moves as one object. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 16 For the move start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 781 . Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 17 For the move endpoint. click (Move).Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. After you specify the location to move to.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The first click specifies the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The Move command requires two clicks.

20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. select Auto . 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 21 Click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Origin to Origin. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. and select c_Townhouse.18 On the View menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.

when the vertical line displays. click (Rotate). 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. and click to specify the end of the rotation. In this case. you first specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 783 . and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and.23 On the Edit toolbar.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move). 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the start point. 30 For the starting point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 785 . click (Copy). The Copy command works much like the Move command. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.

if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 37 On the View toolbar. click Rotate. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . use the Move command to make any adjustments. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 34 On the Options Bar. under Identity data. click (Default 3D View). 35 In the Element Properties dialog.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. and click OK. for Name. click . 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A.

In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. do so before continuing.38 On the File menu. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you need this project file open and in this view. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 787 . you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. 2 On the SteeringWheels. they were placed too low within the site topography. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. After linking the files. When you originally linked the files. In the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels). you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click and hold Orbit. click Save.

4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. when it highlights. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. 3 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. To do this. and click to select it. Click the Revit Links tab. In this case.rvt. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. When using the Align command. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. and double-click South. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. expand Elevations. under Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. and click OK. and click to select the line. and then select the plane that you want to align. In the steps that follow. you first select the plane you want to align to. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project.

align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. click (Default 3D View). Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click and hold Orbit. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click 13 On the View toolbar. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. under Elevations. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 789 . Both townhouses should be at the proper level. This would over-constrain the model. (SteeringWheels). 15 On the File menu. 11 Return to the South elevation view. click Save. 12 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. double-click North.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project.

expand c_Townhouse.rvt. In the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. click Custom. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 10 Click OK. detail level. you need this project file open and in this view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view.rvt. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. double-click South. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. do so before continuing.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 9 Under Visibility. click By Host View. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 2 On the View menu. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you link a file. and the halftone settings for each linked project. you can independently control the visibility settings. under Elevations. click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. or Custom. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As you can see. In this exercise. 4 Under Visibility. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. scroll down and clear Levels. select <Custom>. 8 For Annotation Categories. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. click the Revit Links tab. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. display settings. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. By linked view.

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 14 On the View menu. and then set the detail level to coarse. By selecting custom under Model Categories. click By Host View. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. Using the Custom option. With linked files. and click OK. 23 In the Model categories list. medium. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 24 Click OK. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. click the Revit Links tab. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. By default. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. under Floor Plans. In this case. under Display Settings. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. You can click the value for Detail Level. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness.rvt. or fine. select <Custom>. double-click Level 1. 16 Under Visibility. no detail level changes are required. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 20 For c_Townhouse. click the Revit Links tab. expand c_Townhouse. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. on the Basics tab. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Custom. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 791 .rvt.

on a sloped site for instance. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. demolished. click OK. there are situations. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. By default. With the Show All filter applied. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. click Save. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you need this project file open and in this view. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. select c_Townhouse. In this case. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. and phase filter of a specific link. 29 Click OK. In most cases. However. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In this exercise. you manage the linked files. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. this is preferable. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 25 On the Revit Links tab. phase. In the next exercise. 26 Under Display Settings. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. existing. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed.rvt. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. under Visibility. In this case. click Custom for the Townhouse link. All other components are grayed out. 31 On the File menu. all new. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file.

do so before continuing. 4 Under Linked File. In general. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. click the Revit tab.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. select c_Condo_Complex. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. 5 Click Unload. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. The default path type is Relative. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. Notice the Loaded. 3 Under Path Type. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. 7 Click OK. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. click Yes. 6 At the confirmation prompt. Locations Not Saved. click Manage Links. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. the link is maintained. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. Managing Linked Building Models | 793 . and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. In a shared coordinate environment. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.rvt.

8 In the Project Browser. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. and select Specify. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. click Save As. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. and click Reload. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. In general. the link is not loaded.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. If you choose not to open that workset. To do this. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. However. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. right-click c_Condo_Complex. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. expand Revit Links. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files.rvt. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. click the arrow next to the Open button. When you initially place the link.

If you have not completed the previous lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. When used in conjunction with model linking. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 795 .10 In the Save As dialog. In the next lesson. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In essence. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In this exercise. you are establishing a shared origin point. and the resulting project files. leave the project file open in its current view. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. do so before continuing. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. The host file consists primarily of site components. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 778. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. name the file Site_Project. and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. When you share coordinates between projects.

do so before continuing.rvt and click Open. and the resulting project files. In this case. open it before continuing. click the Condo Complex.coordinates are used. 3 In the drawing area. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. When you are working in the host project. If you have not completed the lesson. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. Linking Building Models on page 778. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Site_Project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. If you have closed the project. 2 On the Tools menu. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project.

and click OK. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. even though both models originate from one linked file. Lot B. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. this location is not saved outside of the host project. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 797 . if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. you need this project file open and in this view. On the Status Bar. it is placed at a specific location. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. These three locations can be named Lot A. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. and Lot C. select Location 1. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. but can have multiple additional locations. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. If you have not completed the exercise. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. However. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. do so before continuing. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. when the edges highlight. click to select it. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host.

under Instance Parameters. under Instance Parameters. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. enter Lot A for New. click Not Shared for Shared Location. and click OK. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. This is a one-time operation. click Not Shared for Shared Location. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. . 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.2 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. In the Choose Location dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click . click OK. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. click Rename. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. Record the current position as a location. 7 In the Rename dialog. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Reconcile. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Move instance to. click Change. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 4 Under Value. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

This is a two-click process. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. and then select the townhouse project. 23 Click Save Locations. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 799 . click OK. 16 Click Change. and click OK. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. and click OK. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. the active location position is moved. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click OK. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select the second option. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. and the left townhouse resides at that location. Notice the OK button is still not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists.Notice the OK button is not active. enter Lot B for Name. The second click specifies the move endpoint. When you relocate a project. 30 On the Tools menu. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click the Revit tab. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. When you create a location. click OK. you cannot redefine its location. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. a warning displays. Because Lot A is currently in use. ignore the warning. By relocating a project. click Duplicate. When you release the mouse button. Save locations 21 On the File menu. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 19 In the Select Location dialog. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. make sure Lot B is selected. select Save. and click OK. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. To explicitly save a location. or cancel the action. Record current position as. click Manage Links.

click Close. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 800 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE In the following exercise. click Undo to return the origin to its original position.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 36 On the File menu. and click OK. you work in one of the linked projects. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. select Save. 33 On the Edit menu. In this exercise. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 34 On the File menu. click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.

Because this building model only has one named location. When opening the linked file. 2 On the File menu. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. double-click 1st Floor. select Auto . if other models were linked into the same host.rvt file. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. In this exercise. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Select c_Condo_Complex. The current active location is Lot A. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.rvt file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the exercises. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. For Positioning. it is placed automatically within the host project. under Floor Plans.By Shared Coordinates. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Click Open. Also. click Open. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. In addition. Working with a Linked Building Model | 801 . do so before continuing. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the host file. do so before continuing. you need this project file open and in this view. click Manage Place and Locations. 6 Select Lot B. 802 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In the next exercise. In this exercise. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. select True North for Orientation. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you manage the shared locations. If you have not completed the exercises. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. you create a new location. and click OK. and click OK. click View Properties. click Duplicate. orient a view to true north. 7 Click OK. In this exercise. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Graphics. and click Make Current. you can select Lot C if necessary. enter Lot C. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 3 In the Name dialog. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance.

do so before continuing. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. click Open. If you have not completed the exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. 10 On the File menu.rvt and click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 803 . Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Select Site_Project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. click Close. You can save the file if you wish.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. On the Options Bar. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Count. 804 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. select Doors.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. and click OK. under Category. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

select Family and Type for Sort by. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 12 Select Grand totals. and click Properties. right-click Door Schedule. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 14 On the File menu. click Save. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 13 On the File menu. click Close. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 805 . under Other. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Itemize every instance. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. and then click OK twice. expand Schedules/Quantities. You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.8 Click OK.

806 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 807 .

808 .

which is independent of the project settings. 3 In the Options dialog.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. In the first lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 4 Under Colors. you create an office template. These settings control the graphics. Finally. click Browse. you modify the system environment. and set it as your default template. In the second lesson. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture.rte. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. select Invert background color. Notice that the drawing area is black. they are not saved to project files or template files. and your username when using worksets. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 8 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. selection default options. notification preferences. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. journal cleanup options. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab. 809 . 6 In the New Project dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.

rvt. select yellow. select One hour. 18 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Colors. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click the Graphics tab. 19 On the Design Bar. select None. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. clear Invert background color. and open Imperial\i_Settings. click the value for Selection color. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 14 Under Notifications. select red. and select the wall. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Selection color. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. However. 12 In the Color dialog. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click the Graphics tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 26 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. 15 Click OK. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. 22 When prompted to save changes. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open.10 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click No. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 13 Click the General tab. click Wall. the elements causing the error display using this color. click Modify.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. under Default path for family template files. However. 8 Click Cancel. notice the list of library names. family template files. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. If prompted. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Normal. Under Username. select the folder to save your files to by default. click Browse. select your preferred Save reminder interval. click Places. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. For Tooltip assistance. 10 In the Places dialog. such as in a large. Under Journal File Cleanup. 7 In the Options dialog. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 811 . This path is set automatically during the installation process. These files are used in the software support process. you specify default file locations. centralized. do not save the changes. 2 In the Options dialog. you can start a new project with that template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Your login name displays by default. click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.27 Click the General tab. and click Browse to select a template. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. including your default project template. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 4 Click Cancel. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and click Open. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. TIP To view a template. and family libraries. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Specifying File Locations on page 811. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files.

and Import dialogs. 11 In the Places dialog. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). under Libraries. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and you can create new libraries.library names and path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. When you are opening. and select it as the library path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Load. or families. and change the name to My Library. or loading a Revit Architecture file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Save. saving. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click Open. In the following illustration. and click the icon side of the field.

29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specifying Spelling Options | 813 . 24 Click 25 Click OK. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Load. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Specifying Spelling Options on page 813. and decal image files. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 9 In the text editor. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 2 In the Options dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. view the current path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 5 In the text editor. click the My Library icon. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Click Places. Save. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 3 Under Settings. such as bump maps. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 19 Click Cancel. and Import dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. specify the new location here. click the Spelling tab. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 23 Select My Library. If you work in a large office. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you want to relocate this path. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. custom color files. 28 Click OK. 21 Click the File Locations tab. click My Library. click Edit. 15 Under Library Name.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. This path is determined during installation. and click OK twice.

5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Text. you modify snap increments. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Restore Defaults. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.11 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Training Files. 12 On the Standard toolbar.rte. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click default template. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. you modify snap settings. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 21 In the text editor. click Modify. 19 Under Settings. under Template file. do not save the changes. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Edit. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modifying Snap Settings on page 814. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. delete sheetmtl-CU. 23 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click OK. In this exercise. If prompted. click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 2 In the New Project dialog. click the Spelling tab. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. 18 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. work with snapping turned off. click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click in the drawing area. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. clear Chain. enter SM. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings | 815 . if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not. and move the cursor to the right. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If you do not have a wheel button. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.6 Under Dimension Snaps. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click Wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 Under Object Snaps.. zoom out until it does so. and enter 1 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse. TIP To zoom while sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.

the midpoint. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and delete the value 1’ . and specify the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and move the cursor to the right. and do not save the file. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that snapping is once again active. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and click Wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 24 Click OK.This is the increment that you added previously. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Modifying Project Settings on page 817. Do not set the wall end point.. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and the wall edges. 18 Enter SM. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.

save the project file with a unique name. In the steps that follow. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you render a region to observe the changes. Finally. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. When you apply a material to an element. click Training Files. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. annotations. fill patterns. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor.rvt. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and open Imperial\i_Settings. lines. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Modifying Project Settings | 817 . you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. You create and modify materials. and object styles. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using these options. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class.Fieldstone. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . this material provides a starting point for the new material. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. In the steps that follow. and click OK. The Render Appearance Library is a local.Stone. 3 Click (Duplicate). enter Masonry . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the next exercise. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. When you change properties of a render appearance. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Class. The properties describe the color. and click (Element Properties). you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. and double-click 02 Entry Level. When a model element is loaded into a project. select Stone. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 11 Click OK.Fieldstone. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 6 Click Replace. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 10 Click the Graphics tab. 9 Click Apply. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. Masonry . In the Materials dialog. These details will display in rendered images. scale. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and select Masonry . and texture of the material. read-only library for render appearances.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. However. 2 Scroll down the materials list.Fieldstone material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. and click OK. 8 Select Riverstone Blue.

26 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 19 On the right side of the Material field. Creating and Applying Materials | 819 . click (Default 3D View). click Edit. 18 For Finish 1.Fieldstone. select the rear exterior wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 21 Click OK three times. 15 Click Duplicate. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 23 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. select Masonry . .Fieldstone. click This is the material that you created.Brick. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 20 In the Materials dialog. 16 Enter the new wall name. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click Model Graphics Style. click in the Material field. 25 On the View toolbar. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 17 For Structure. 24 In the Type Selector.

select the render region (a red rectangle). select Low or Medium. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. 32 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. The rendering process begins. select Region. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 31 In the Rendering dialog. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 29 In the 3D view. 28 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. under Quality. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. click Rendering Dialog. for Setting. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. and click Rendering. When finished. right-click the Design Bar. In the following exercise.

36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. in the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Drafting pattern density is fixed. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Zoom into the model.rvt. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 821 . 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. expand Elevations. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. i_Settings-in progress. and clear Region. click Show the model. click Show the model. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Then click Render again.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 33 In the Rendering dialog. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. such as steel. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. and double-click West.

pat. 8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click Training Files. and for Import scale.Fieldstone. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 5 Click New. click . enter Fieldstone. choose Model. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 10 For Name. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 7 Under Custom. 13 On the Options Bar. click Import. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 11 Click OK. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter . Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. click in the Material field. select fldstn. click 15 For Structure. click Edit/New. for Finish 1.56. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. (Element Properties). and click OK. click Edit.Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 9 Under Custom. 3 Under Pattern Type. select Custom.

In the Materials dialog.Fieldstone material. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. TIP If the pattern does not display. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. adjust your zoom settings as needed. click Modify. 21 In the Materials dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. under Pattern Type. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you can set the window frame material to By Category. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. click (Default 3D View). there are often multiple window types within a project. click to select a fill pattern. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click OK. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. i_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles | 823 . 25 On the View toolbar.rvt. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Model. 22 Click OK three times. 18 Under Surface Pattern. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Controlling Object Styles on page 823. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. 23 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3 Windows. For example.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click in the Value column. and click 15 Click OK twice. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. click By Category. click (Element Properties). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. under Materials and Finishes. . 3 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New. for Trim Exterior Material. click Edit/New. 10 Select the arched window. 5 On the Options Bar. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). click By Category (located under the materials list). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.2 On the keyboard. 14 In the Materials dialog. 9 Click OK twice. click in the Value column. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). and click . under Materials and Finishes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.

25 In the search field. type red. and click 20 In the Materials dialog.red paint. (Duplicate). select Trim. Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click in the Material column. enter Trim . . 23 Click Replace. or keywords include the word red. descriptions. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. for Name. 18 On the Model Objects tab. Controlling Object Styles | 825 . and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab.Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 19 For Trim. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. and select Trim. select Paint. for Class. expand Windows.

29 In the Materials dialog.26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 28 Under Shading. i_Settings-in progress. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. is open with the 3D view active. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click OK. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. i_Settings-in progress.rvt. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click New. (Default 3D view). You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 826. 31 On the View toolbar. and click OK. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. for Name. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. When you render a 3D view.rvt. click OK. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter Roof Line. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. under Category. select Roof Line. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.6 Click OK twice. 12 Click OK. 10 For Line Color. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. Now that you have created a line pattern. 11 For Line Pattern. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 827 . select Roofs. select Red.

15 In the Project Browser. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. double-click 03 Roof. but not the line pattern. double-click to Building. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the line color displays in this view. elevations. Plans.13 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 14 On the View Control Bar. NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. sections. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style.

31 Click OK. enter Zoning Setback. 34 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select 2. 29 For Name. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. ■ Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 829 . click Lines. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. click New. 33 In the Type Selector. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. Click (Draw). select Level: 02 Entry Level. For Color. For Pattern. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Roof Line. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Solid. This places the line above the topography. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. For Line Color. click Override. select Black. For Line Pattern. select Double Dash 5/8" . for Visibility. select Blue. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans. 25 Click OK twice. select Roofs. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 20 Click OK. under Category. select Red. 18 For Line Color. under Modify Subcategories. select 5. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Zoning Setback. and click OK. double-click Site. 19 For Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Roofs.

40 In the Project Browser. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. (Default 3D View). 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Annotations on page 831. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. NOTE If Site is not selected. 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. click (Default 3D View). click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 39 Click OK. expand Lines. 36 On the View toolbar. select it. and clear Zoning Setback. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Property Lines. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the View toolbar. Expand Site. 43 Click OK. double-click 02 Entry Level.■ Click (Line). and clear Zoning Setback. and then clear Property Lines. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view.

10 On the Standard toolbar. To place a dimension. click Duplicate. 5 Under Text. and then click outside the second wall. and place a dimension on the floor plan. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. For Unit suffix. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click one wall. click the default value. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. i_Settings-in progress. for Units Format. click Dimension. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. You have created a new dimension style. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click another wall.Metric. For Units. 4 Enter the name Linear . is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. select mm. select Linear . under Floor Plans. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. select Millimeters. 7 Click OK twice.Metric and click OK. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations | 831 . 9 In the Type Selector.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. i_Settings-in progress.rvt. double-click 02 Entry Level. (Undo). click Modify. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

14 On the Options Bar. click the bottom window. 18 In the Tags dialog. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Leave Window Tag . scroll to Windows and notice that Window Tag . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 27 On the west wall. click Window Tag . Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click (Element Properties).Number as the assigned tag. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Then press Delete. Window Tag . 23 Click OK. 21 In the Tags dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag .Number.Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. In the preview image. 28 On the Design Bar. Under Category. 19 Click Load. select the 3 window tags. 16 Click Cancel. 30 Under Leader. In the steps that follow. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. notice that the label displays 1i. scroll down to Windows. click Tag ➤ By Category.rfa. and click OK. notice Window Tags appears twice. click Tag All Not Tagged.Number is now the assigned tag. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number. verify that Create is clear. under Category. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 24 While pressing CTRL. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. clear Leader. click Training Files. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. the other displays the instance value.Number.

Click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. Unless overridden. dimensions use these project settings. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 4 In the Project Units dialog. i_Settings-in progress. For Unit symbol.Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options on page 833. select To the nearest 1/16". you specify the project units of measurements. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Area. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 32 On the View toolbar. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. click Modify. you modify the detail level assignments. and click OK. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specifying Units of Measurement. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. select 0 decimal places. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 9 Under Doors and Windows. select Faces. In this project. 6 Click OK. for Length. for Rounding. select Openings. 31 On the Design Bar. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 8 Under Walls. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. In the second section. select SF. Temporary Dimensions. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. and Detail Level Options | 833 . (Default 3D View). NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. dimension values display using this setting. Specifying Units of Measurement. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. In the first section. Unless overridden. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and click OK. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. In the final section. click the default value.rvt. click the default value.

14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and expand 3D Views. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome.When you create a new view and specify its view scale. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. In this table. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. In this exercise. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Notice the 1/4" = 1’ 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click Training Files. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .rvt. click . To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. You do not select a view scale to move it. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click OK.

5 On the Views tab.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 12 Click the Sheets tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. 14 In the Project Browser. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. under Sheets. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click OK. In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .2 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 835 . select Discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set. and click OK. and click Apply. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. expand each view type. expand Sheets (all).Phase 2-Structure West Wing .

22 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand 3D Views. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. In the lesson that follows. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file.Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 Click the Views tab. under Views. and expand both Architectural and Structural. and click New. click the Folders tab. navigate to your preferred directory. you create an office template. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Complete. In this lesson. View Type (Family and Type). Proceed to the next lesson. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. enter a unique file name. If you want to save this file. Creating an Office Template on page 837. and click OK. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and Discipline. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase.

you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. close them. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. When you create new projects. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation.Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Whenever you create a new project or template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Creating an Office Template | 837 . drag a zoom region around the level heads. you select the starting point for your office template. dimensions styles. in the drawing area. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. 6 Click OK. When you create a new template based on an existing template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 4 Select the Construction-Default. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. select Project. click Training Files. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. the same rules apply. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. In that case. 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. For example. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. and open Imperial\Templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 7 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Template file.rte template. when you create a new project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can choose from several templates. click Browse. If you have additional projects open. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and click Open. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. levels. and view names. 12 Under Template File. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. and double-click North. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. 5 In the New Project dialog. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. click Browse.

see the previous lesson. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. see Modifying Project Settings on page 817. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 15 Under Create new. and click OK. 14 Click Open.13 Select the default template. or refer to the online help. texture. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. When you create or modify a material. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In this exercise. and similar attributes. you modify the project settings for your new template. create and modify them as needed. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . transparency. 2 Scroll down the materials list. When you create the material. Observe the materials that are already defined. Modifying Project Settings on page 838. Modifying System Settings on page 809. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. weights. If you want to use a template other than the default. For more details on modifying these settings. you can select it now. including color. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. TIP For more information about creating new materials. specific modifications are not dictated. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. During this exercise. select Project template. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. or refer to the online help. You do this by defining the render appearance.

12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. and move model patterns. line colors. and create new subcategories as needed. 19 If necessary. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. create new line subcategories. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. create new subcategories. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 13 If necessary.3 Click the Render Appearance tab. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. see Specifying File Locations on page 811. or modify existing patterns. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. and scroll through the list of categories. 18 For existing line categories. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and imported objects. 4 Click Replace. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. see a preview of the rendered material. modify the line weight. the changes are saved as part of the project template. rotate. You can add and delete view scales. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. annotation objects. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. and materials for model objects. Modifying Project Settings | 839 . line color. and change render appearance properties. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 20 Click OK. 15 Modify categories. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. For more information. In the Object Styles dialog. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. line patterns. If you change render appearance properties. 9 Click OK when finished. or line pattern as needed. you can set line weights. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. See Modifying Project Settings on page 817 for more information on creating new fill patterns. You can align. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form.

tags. and click Edit. 40 Click OK. click Duplicate. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and dimensions. click Duplicate. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style.The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. Linear. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. To see the details of a particular style. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. angular. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. such as section lines and dimension lines. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 32 To modify a line pattern. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 34 Click OK. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. select it. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. select it from this list. select it from this list. To see the details of a particular style. and specify the properties. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. name the style. 46 Click OK. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. and specify the properties. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 29 Click OK. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. name the style.

when you add a door with the tag option selected. 62 Click OK. When you create a new view. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category.47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 53 For Length. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. The detail level is based on view scale. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Using the arrows between the columns. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 61 Under Doors and Windows. In the Tags dialog. or Fine. 65 Click OK. click Load. 60 Under Walls. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. and click OK. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. Volume. click Format. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. and move view scales as needed. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 55 Click OK. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. and choose a decimal symbol. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 58 Click OK. click the arrows between columns. 57 Specify the Slope option. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. To move the view scales. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 50 To load new annotation tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. TIP In the drawing area. 64 Review the table. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Medium. Modifying Project Settings | 841 . The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. For example. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and Angle settings.

you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. or edit existing organization types. rename. rename. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each command is available on the Settings menu. 68 Delete. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. 71 Delete. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. furniture. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. Phases Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 599 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 69 If necessary. 72 If necessary. Although these settings can be saved within a template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. create new browser organization types. 70 Click the Sheets tab. This could be useful for things such as hardware. create new browser organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. phase filters.Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Project Phasing on page 767 If necessary. click the Views tab. For example. In such a case. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Links to associated tutorials are provided. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Use the table below as a checklist. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you can set up the phases. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. However. or edit existing organization types. or electrical fixtures. In a typical project. 73 Click OK. You can find additional information in Help. If necessary. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.

Site Settings If necessary. or use the Project Browser. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. you could load detail components. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you can move onto the next component type. the section cut material. title blocks. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. In addition. you do both. However. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695 Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and the poche depth. 3 To modify. or add to this selection. Depending on the intended use of this template. or load a new door type. and electrical fixtures. click Bar. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. do so before starting this exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. You can load any family or group into a template. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. If you have not completed the previous exercise. If this selection is satisfactory. notice the list of doors already loaded. you may want to delete. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. create. For example. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. click Door. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 843 . You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. In the steps that follow. 2 In the Type Selector. there are some important thoughts to consider. Although the options are endless. Although this is possible. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. and click Open. click Load. For example.Settings Menu Command View Templates Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Select it. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 843. modify. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. or modify a door. create.

You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. and select the title block type. Enter a name. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load.Goal: Modify door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed. click Edit/New. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. 9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Create new door type 4 Click OK.) 10 Expand the title block. expand Families. Make modifications. Modify type properties. and click OK. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Click Duplicate. and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.

In addition. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Load. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. In this exercise. To do so. click 12 Click Preview. This title block is currently part of the template. load. create. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. you will first modify view templates. (Element Properties). you create the views required for your template. Detail Level. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson.11 On the Options Bar. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. View Range. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and click Delete. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. To load a title block. Discipline. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. In this exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates | 845 . The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. In addition. 13 Click OK. you created new projects using different templates. right-click the component.

Every time a new plan view is created. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and then click OK. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. open the view from the Project Browser. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. double-click South. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply.Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. Blue level heads have associated plan views. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Black level heads have no associated views. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. and click OK. you can apply a view template to any view. 4 If necessary. and apply the appropriate template. and click OK. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Level 2. 12 In the Project Browser. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Apply. select Site Plan. After applying the template. under Floor Plans. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 11 Click Apply. under Elevations. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. In addition. Notice the level names. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. select Architectural Plan. 6 Click OK. 2 Under Names. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and double-click Level 1. At any time. click Apply. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 15 In the Project Browser.

You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. right-click the view name. Modifying Views and View Templates | 847 . on the View toolbar. right-click the ViewCube. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. under 3D Views. click Schedule/Quantities. or delete this view. and select the desired direction. duplicate. and click Properties. or an edge of the ViewCube. click Level. 31 Rename the 3D View. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. click Orient to View. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. right-click the ViewCube. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. in the Project Browser. in the shortcut menu. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Project Browser. and modify their properties accordingly. under Floor Plans. 23 To add more levels to the template. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click 29 In the Project Browser. If prompted. and click Save View. expand 3D Views. and click Rename. notice that you have the option to rename. review the existing floor plans. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 27 Create additional levels as needed. right-click Level 1. To orient the 3D view to another view. right-click {3D}. enter a view name. 30 In the Project Browser. and elevations. right-click the ViewCube. If you want to modify view properties. By default. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. duplicate. (Default 3D View). click Orient to a Direction. and. 22 In the Project Browser. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Rename.20 In the Project Browser. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. a face. To orient the 3D view to a direction. select Make Plan View. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the desired view. 24 On the Options Bar. You can add schedules to a template. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. ceiling plans. If it does not display. use the ViewCube. review the floor plans. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. or delete them as needed.

modify settings as needed.35 If you want to add schedules to your template. assign filters. expand Sheets (all). You can still add views to the sheet. select and order required fields. On the Formatting tab. 848 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. select one.txt for MicroStation). 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. After the sheet is created. modify settings as needed. on the View tab of the Design Bar. modify settings as needed. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. and click OK. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or exportlayersdgn.txt for AutoCAD. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. and click Rename. 37 Click OK. select the title block and delete it. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 848. select the default title block. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Right-click the sheet name. On the Filter tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. When you import a DWG or DXF file. TIP In the Export Layers dialog. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. To later add a title block to a sheet. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 42 Create new sheets as needed. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. click Sheet. Select a view. and click OK. and click OK. in the Project Browser. click Add View. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. To do so. 40 To add views to the sheet. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. You are prompted to select a title block. On the Appearance tab. select the category type. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock.

name the file. You can save these mappings to a text file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and so on. This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select Save As. name the file. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 For each category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When you create a multi-category schedule. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. and click Save. project parameters. for example. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. For example. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 255 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 849 . Using shared parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. therefore. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. When scheduling. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. and click Save. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. project parameters. and click Save. 9 Click Save As. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. windows. They cannot be shared with other projects. name the file.2 For each category. doors. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Save As. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and they become the set mappings for the project. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. because each office has a unique set of needs. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 8 In the dialog. These settings are retained within the project template. and so on.

6 Create as many groups as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 10 Click OK. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 8 Under Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If this template will be used by multiple team members. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 22 Click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. click New. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 21 Under Categories. under Groups. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. For each parameter group. 9 Name the parameter. 25 Click Select. 3 Name and save the file. 850 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you may want to save the file to a network location.on page 231. and choose a shared parameter. you can create a list of parameters. 14 Click Add. 19 Under Group parameter under. 24 To add a shared project parameter. select a parameter discipline type. select a parameter value type. 11 For each parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and specify its discipline and type. enter a parameter name. 16 Under Parameter Data. select a group to add parameters to. and click OK. 28 Click OK. 23 Add project parameters as needed. click Add. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. click New. 18 Under Type of Parameter. for Name. 26 Click OK. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. 17 Under Discipline. and select Shared Parameter. If a file already exists. 2 Click Create. add required parameters. 5 Enter the group name. select Project parameter.

or refer to the online help. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 34 For Category. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. click Setup. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. By going first to the Print command. and make it your default template file. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. and click Open. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. and print. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter a name for the schedule. For information on creating multi-category tags. and create new settings for this printer. For each printer. select a different printer. 2 Under Printer. click Save as. and the percent of actual size. enter a new name for the printer. you create named print settings. 35 For Name. you can load them into the template. and click OK. click OK. modify the printer settings. paper placement. 5 Click Save As. select Multi-Category. 9 In the Print dialog. 6 In the New dialog. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. select the tag. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 32 Navigate to the directory. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. In this exercise. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 4 Modify the printer settings. The tag is now part of the template. 37 When you have completed the schedule. for Name. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. you need only select a setting.29 Add shared project parameters as needed. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. Create additional settings as needed. save the file as a template. make minor modifications if necessary. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. By creating named settings within the template. click Setup. 3 Under Settings. Creating Named Print Settings | 851 . Click OK.

and click Open. By investing the time to individualize your template. loaded components. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. If you have a project. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. You can also set this template as your default template. 23 For Default template file. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 11 Click Close when finished. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 19 Select the template. 22 Click the File Locations tab. you modified settings. 25 Click OK. 14 Under Save as type. save it in a network location.10 Repeat these steps as needed. and saved them to a template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. In addition. 20 Click OK. In addition. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 15 Name the template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. The only remaining task is to save it. and click Open. select it. This can provide a good starting point for a template. and click Save. select Template Files (*. 18 Click Browse. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. Your template is complete.rte). If you need to share this file with others. 852 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Browse. In this lesson. 24 Navigate to the template location. you ensure that office standards are maintained.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful